JP2018079193A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine with enhanced energy saving mode.SOLUTION: A game machine which gives a game value to a player comprises: control means for executing a program for controlling progress of a game; game value information display means for displaying information on the given game value; and performance display means for displaying a performance of a special symbol variation display game when a game ball enters a start port to win. The control means controls a display mode to be in a low power mode in which power consumption of the performance display means is reduced, and the display mode is not changed such that power consumption of the game value information display means is reduced, during the low power mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 39

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a game value is given to a player based on a result of a lottery executed by the main controller when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. Further, Patent Document 1 describes a gaming machine equipped with an energy saving mode that operates with less power consumption than usual.

JP 2006-150036 A

  In gaming machines, it is necessary to reduce power consumption other than during gaming.

  Energy saving technology is also a social request, and a gaming machine with lower power consumption is desired.

  An object of this invention is to provide the game machine which implement | achieved the more substantial energy saving mode.

  An example of the invention disclosed in this specification is as follows. That is, a gaming machine that gives a game value to a player, a control unit that executes a program for controlling the progress of the game, a game value information display unit that displays information about the assigned game value, and a start port Effect display means for displaying an effect of a special symbol variation display game performed in response to the winning of the game, the control means controls the display mode to a low power mode in which the power consumption of the effect display means is reduced, During the low power mode, the display mode is not changed so as to reduce the power consumption of the game value information display means.

  According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a rich energy saving mode.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view which shows an example of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from back. It is the front view which cut | disconnected the front structural member and table | surface unit in the game board at the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game area | region. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the structure in main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of a serial communication circuit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an initialization process. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the initialization process of FIG. 20. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an accessory ratio calculation and a display process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the accessory ratio calculation / display process of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement | positioning of the program (code) stored in ROM, RAM, and data which were incorporated in main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the area | region for an accessory ratio calculation. It is a figure which shows the structure of an accessory ratio display. It is a figure which shows the structure of a driver circuit. FIG. 6 is a timing diagram of data input to a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of mounting of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship of main control MPU and an accessory ratio display. It is a figure which shows a load register selection table. It is a figure which shows a character generator decoding table. It is a state transition diagram of a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of an accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of an accessory ratio. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the area | region update area | region for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of base calculation and a display process. It is a figure which shows an example of the update timing of a prize ball number, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of a prize ball number, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of a prize ball number, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of a prize ball number, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of a prize ball number, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update area | region for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation and display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update area | region for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation and display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update area | region for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation and display process. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the area | region for base calculation. It is a front view which shows another example of a game board. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update area | region for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update area | region for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation and display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation and display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation and display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation and display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a display selection process. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a display screen. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update area | region for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area | region update area | region for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base calculation and display process. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front member opened. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the various mechanism elements with which the slot machine was equipped, electronic devices, an operation member, etc. It is a figure which shows the detail of the storage area | region provided by ROM, RAM, etc. in this embodiment, and a ROM area | region. It is a figure which shows the detail of the RAM area | region in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the area | region for an accessory ratio calculation. It is a figure which shows the detail of the parameter information setting area | region of this embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the procedure of the system reset starting process performed when a slot machine is reset. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a regular process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the information signal N output process.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 thru | or FIG. 9, the whole structure of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame 3 opened from the main frame and the main frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame 3, the game board 5, the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2, and FIG. 9 shows the pachinko machine as the door frame 3, the game board 5, It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled into the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, and was seen from back.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member. 20 includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 which are connected to each other at both ends and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the left end of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end portion of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is attached to a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 that has a quadrangular outer shape in front view and penetrates back and forth, and a lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. A tray unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 A unit 400, a right side unit 450 attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100, and a game ball attached to the upper right portion 201 of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201 A handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the player into the game area of the game board 5, and the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 A foul cover unit 520 that receives a game ball that has been attached to the game unit and missed into the game area and discharges it to the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and a game ball on the upper plate 201 that is attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base unit 100. A ball feed unit 540 for sending to the ball launcher 680, a glass unit 560 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and closing the through-hole 111, and a security cover 580 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 560. ing.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the main body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are attached to the right side of the main body frame base as viewed from the front. And door 3 and a locking unit 700 that locks between the main body frame 4 and a reverse L-shaped payout that is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out a game ball to the player side. The unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be opened and closed. And a back cover 980.

  Inside the back cover 980, a main control unit 1300 is provided for performing control related to the progress of the game performed in the pachinko machine 1. The main control unit 1300 is provided with an accessory ratio indicator 1317. The accessory ratio display 1317 is configured by, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED. The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be provided not on the main control unit 1300 but on the payout control board unit 950.

  Further, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244 without providing a separate display device for displaying the accessory ratio. In this case, if the accessory ratio is constantly displayed on any of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the player can be notified of the accessory ratio, and the player may be able to confirm the state of the pachinko machine.

  As will be described later, the ratio of the winning combination can be calculated by the number of winning balls divided by the total number of acquired balls. For example, a pachinko machine with a high value of the winning ratio (for example, 90%) has many winning balls depending on the jackpot. Since it is obtained, it can be said that it is in good condition. On the other hand, a pachinko machine with a low value of an accessory ratio (for example, 10%) can be said to be in a bad condition because there are few jackpot games and few winning balls in the jackpot. Therefore, the player can select a pachinko machine to play in consideration of the numerical value of the accessory ratio.

  As a mode for notifying the player of the bonus rate, the numeric value of the bonus rate may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, when the ratio of an accessory is 70% or more, the numerical value is displayed in red, the frame lamp is lit red or flashes, and when it is 69% to 30%, the numerical value is displayed in green, and the frame lamp is lit green or flashes. To do. The numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in such a manner that it is not mistaken for a decorative design. For example, it may be displayed in such a manner that it is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the display position of the decorative symbol when it is not changed, or the size of the number indicating the accessory ratio is made smaller than that of the decorative symbol. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

  Further, the player may be informed of the accessory ratio by changing the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 according to the value of the accessory ratio. For example, when the ratio of the actors is 70% or more, the decoration pattern is displayed in red, the frame lamp is lit red or blinks, and when it is 69% to 30%, the decoration pattern is displayed in green, and the frame lamp is lit green. Or blink. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

  Further, it may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 provided in the door frame 3. In that case, the display mode mentioned above may be changed, and it may be displayed together with other information as well as the accessory ratio. The other information includes the number of jackpots, the number of consecutive jackpots (the so-called consecutive number of times), the number of balls and the remaining balance.

  Further, not only the accessory ratio, but also a continuous accessory ratio and a base value, which will be described later, may be displayed by changing the mode as described above. The display mode of the combination ratio, the continuous combination ratio, and the base value may be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is enclosed in a transparent resin main control board box 1320 sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once closed, and is placed on the printed board. Can be seen from the outside. Further, for example, when the back cover 980 is formed of a transparent resin, the main control unit 1300 can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the accessory ratio indicator 1317 provided in the main control unit 1300 is displayed on the pachinko machine. It can be seen from the back side of the machine 1. By enclosing the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in the main control board box 1320, unauthorized modification of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 to make the gaming machine 1 look less radiant can be prevented. Can display euphoria.

  When the back cover 980 is made of an opaque resin, a hole is formed in the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 or the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is made transparent, The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be seen from the back side of the machine 1.

  Even when the back cover 980 is made of a transparent resin, the surface of the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is formed flat, or the back cover 980 is thinly formed. The ratio indicator 1317 may be easily seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  Below the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, there is provided a discharge port for collecting the game balls that have flowed out of the game area 5a via the out port 1111 and the winning ports 2001, 2005, 2006, etc., and discharging them to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. ing. Note that the game ball discharged from the discharge port is supplied to the ball tank 802 through the island facility. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a discharge ball sensor 3060 for detecting a game ball discharged from the discharge port.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is provided with an accessory ratio display switch 1318. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole through which the accessory ratio display switch 1318 can be operated. It may be displayed (printing, engraving, sticking, etc.) that the switch is for operating the display of the accessory ratio on the printed circuit board in the vicinity of the accessory ratio display switch 1318 or on the main control board box 1320. Note that the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is preferably provided near the accessory ratio indicator 1317. However, even if it is not the main control unit 1300, if it is a place where the operation is easy, other boards (for example, effects) You may provide in the control board 4700, the power supply device 4112), the housing | casing 4100, and the front-surface member 4200. FIG. It may be provided on a relay board provided separately from the peripheral control unit 1500 or the main control unit 1300, a power board in the power board box 930 on the frame side, or a payout control board unit 950. Further, as will be described later, the accessory ratio display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the accessory ratio display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate, it is possible to prevent the player from operating it erroneously.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores a game ball supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. The game ball in the ball tank 802 is moved to the left in a front view. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820 A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on an instruction from a payout control board 951 (see FIG. 17) accommodated in the payout control board unit 950, the payout apparatus 830 pays out one by one, and is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and is discharged by the payout apparatus 830. The upper full-ball path unit 850 that guides the game balls downward and discharges the game balls from either the normal discharge port or the full-discharge port according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 201 in the tray unit 200. And a normal guide path that is attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801 and that guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port of the upper full-ball path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through-ball path 526 of the door frame 3. And a full tank guide path that guides the game balls released from the full tank outlet to the front and guides the game balls from the front end to the full tank receiver 530 of the door frame 3. A lower Kalimantan ball path unit 860, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a speaker for bass that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side when viewed from the front of the board unit base 910. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board therein, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball is housed inside. A payout control board unit 950. .

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, etc., the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is to be shot, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed above the game area 5a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that are guided to the front, a flat game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, and a game panel 1100 A box-shaped board holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side and opened upward, and a main control board 1310 attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 for controlling the game of the pachinko machine 1. A main control unit 1300 and a plurality of winning holes that are attached to the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and can receive game balls that have been driven into the game area 5a. A table unit that (illustration is omitted), and a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 in the upper of the substrate holder 1200, the.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 plays the game with strength according to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. A ball is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Then, when a game ball that has been thrown into the game area 5a is received in a prize opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received prize opening. . Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the game can be enjoyed by the player.

[2. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the right front, FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from behind. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board exploded for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 16 is a front view in which the front structural member and the front unit in the game board are cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area.

  The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven when the player operates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. In addition, the game board 5 has a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape that is substantially rectangular when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. A board-like gaming panel 1100 to be partitioned, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 by driving a game ball into the gaming area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 17) for controlling the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (not shown) in a portion that is in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel Peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged in the center of game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of game panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A main liquid crystal display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games at different positions in the game area 5a. A first start opening 2002 that is always open to accept a ball, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a to detect the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be accepted according to the result of the normal lottery drawn, and a first special lottery drawn by receiving game balls into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 There are provided a first grand prize opening 2005 and a second big prize opening 2006 that allow game balls to be accepted depending on the lottery result or the second special lottery result. The second big prize opening 2006 is composed of two big prize winning openings, a second upper big prize opening 2006a and a second lower big prize opening 2006b, which are arranged in one flow path through which game balls circulate (see FIG. 16).

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted immediately above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a first grand prize port 2005, The side unit 2100 is attached to the left side of the front view along the inner rail 1002 and is attached to the lower side unit 2200 having three general winning ports 2001, and the side unit lower 2200 is attached to the upper left end of the front view. A frame-like shape that is attached to the side unit 2300 and substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a second major winning port 2006. A center accessory 2500.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape that is open at the front, and has a back box 3010 that has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and is arranged at a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage table unit 2000, and a lock for detachably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. A mechanism 3020, a right ball passage unit 3030 that is attached to the right end in front view in the back box 3010 and discharges a game ball received in the general winning port 2001 or the second start port 2004 of the center accessory 2500; It is attached in the back box 3010 near the front end of the lower right corner when viewed from the front. Lower right ball passage unit 3035 for discharging accepted gaming balls out port 2543C, and a.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear face of the back box 3010, the upper relay board cover 3041 covering the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and the rear box 3010 to be rotatable. The box-shaped effect drive board box 3042, the effect drive board 3043 accommodated in the effect drive board box 3042, the panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the panel relay board 3044. And a panel relay board cover 3045 covering the rear side.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached at the front end in the back box 3010 upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front, and a back side below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back-under-back movable production unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back-upper left-movement production unit 3200 attached to the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box The rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and the back top attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Movable effect unit 3400 and lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below opening 3010a in back box 3010 A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[2-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001, and a stop portion 1006 with which a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 contacts is provided.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  On the back side of the game board 5 in the vicinity of the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 (desirably immediately after passing through the backflow prevention member 1007), a launch ball sensor 1020 for detecting a game ball driven into the game area 5a is provided. For example, the launch ball sensor 1020 includes a magnetic sensor, and outputs a signal when a game ball that has passed through the backflow prevention member 1007 and has flowed into the game area 5a is detected. Note that the launch ball sensor 1020 may be provided at a position where the game ball always passes within the game area. By fixing the position of the launch ball sensor 1020 on the game board 5, the specifications can be shared among a plurality of models, and inspection at the manufacturing site and inspection after installation in the hall are facilitated.

  Further, the launch ball sensor 1020 provided upstream of the game area 5a such as the vicinity of the exit of the rails 1001 and 1002 detects the out ball before the winning port sensor detects the winning of the game ball. That is, since the game balls are detected in the order of out balls and prize balls, it is possible to accurately calculate the base value without detecting the prize balls due to the game balls not counted as out balls.

[2-2. Game panel]
Next, the gaming panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface. The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 has an out port 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 holds the panel plate 1110 so that it can be detached from the rear side. The panel holder 1120 has a plurality of mounting holes and positioning holes for mounting the back unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  In a state where the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel plate 1110 is opened to the rear side of the out guide part 1003 of the front component member 1000. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guiding unit 1003 and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[2-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side when assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and formed on the bottom surface. The discharged portion 1201 (see FIG. 14) can be discharged downward.

[2-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15 and FIG. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents, game ball payout, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 can be opened and closed. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[2-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 has two LEDs based on a status indicator composed of one LED for displaying a gaming state and a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball with respect to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display that displays these two LEDs in a lighting manner according to the normal lottery result after the normal symbol is variably displayed by blinking control of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol variation display related to the passage of the game ball with respect to the gate part 2003 Among them, a normal hold indicator composed of two LEDs for indicating the number of hold, which is the number of change displays for which the start condition of change display has not yet been established, and the reception of a game ball to the first start opening 2002 (start winning prize) After the first special symbol is variably displayed by controlling blinking of the eight LEDs based on the first special lottery result drawn by The first special symbol display that displays the LED in the lighting mode according to the first special lottery result and the variation display of the first special symbol related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 is still a variation display By receiving a game ball in the second start port 2004 (occurrence of a start winning) by a first special hold number indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying a hold number that is the number of variable displays for which the start condition is not satisfied. A second special that displays the eight special LEDs in a lighting manner according to the second special lottery result after the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner by controlling blinking of the eight LEDs based on the lottery second special lottery result. Displaying the number of holdings, which is the number of variable displays for which the variable display start condition has not yet been established, among the variable displays of the second special symbol related to the reception of the game ball to the second start port 2004 L The number of repetitions of the opening / closing pattern of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize winning opening 2006 when the second special holding number indicator consisting of D and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result are “big hit” or the like And a round indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying (number of rounds).

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[2-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 17) that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image (see FIG. 17). reference).

[2-7. Main liquid crystal display]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

  As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 that protrude outward from the left side surface in front view, and a right fixing piece that protrudes outward from the right side surface in front view. 1602. This main liquid crystal display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface in front view in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion of a back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixed pieces 1601 obliquely from the rear of the box 3010, the right fixed piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixed piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is moved downward. Is attached to the back box 3010.

[2-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12 and FIGS. 14 to 16. The front unit 2000 of the gaming board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. Projecting rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving game balls that have been struck into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general prize openings 2001 are within the game area 5a. A first start port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game balls, and the game balls are gated The second start opening 2004 that allows game balls to be received according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by passing the section 2003, and the lottery by receiving the game balls to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 A first grand prize opening 2005 and a second big prize opening 2006 that allow game balls to be received either in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  A plurality (four in this case) of general winning awards 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the other one is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed substantially directly below the stop portion 1006 at the upper right in front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed right below the gate portion 2003 from the front view. Of the plurality of general winning ports 2001 described above, the general winning port 2001 disposed in the vicinity of the upper right in the front view in the game area 5a is disposed immediately above the second starting port 2004. The first grand prize winning port 2005 is disposed between the first starting port 2002 and the out port 1111. The second grand prize winning port 2006 is arranged on the right side of the first starting port 2002 in front of the first grand prize winning port 2005.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the second big prize opening 2006 in the table unit 2000 includes a second upper big prize opening 2006a and a second lower big prize opening 2006b arranged along one flow path through which game balls circulate. It is comprised by. In the second big prize opening 2006, the second upper big prize opening 2006a is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower right of the front view, and the second lower big prize opening 2006b is a front view of the second upper big prize opening 2006a. Located on the left side below.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted immediately above the out port 1111 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002 and a first grand prize port 2005, The side unit 2100 is attached to the left side of the front view along the inner rail 1002 and is attached to the lower side unit 2200 having three general winning ports 2001, and the side unit lower 2200 is attached to the upper left end of the front view. A frame-like shape that is attached to the side unit 2300 and substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a second major winning port 2006. A center accessory 2500.

[2-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described. In the game area 5a, the start port unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out port 1111 in the vicinity of the lower end at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The starter unit 2100 has a first starter port 2002 and a first grand prize port 2005.

  The starting port unit 2100 is a rectangular unit base 2101 that is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and extends in the left-right direction and has a first big winning port 2005 that penetrates back and forth. A ball receiving portion 2102 that protrudes forward from the upper portion of the center in the left-right direction above the big prize opening 2005 and that forms the first starting port 2002, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101, and the first starting port. A ball guiding portion 2103 for guiding the game ball received in 2002 downward, a first start port sensor 2104 attached to the ball guide portion 2103 for detecting the game ball received in the first start port 2002, and a first A first attacker unit 2110 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the big prize opening 2005.

  The first attacker unit 2110 of the start opening unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first big prize opening 2005 from the rear, and the front end is opened to the front with the same size as the first big prize opening 2005. The box-shaped unit case 2111 and the first big prize opening door which are horizontally long and flat and are supported by the front end of the unit case 2111 so that the lower side is pivotable so that the first big prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed. A member 2112, a first attacker solenoid 2113 attached to the unit case 2111 for opening and closing the first big prize opening door member 2112, and a first case winning prize opening 2005 attached to the unit case 2111. A first grand prize opening sensor 2114 for detecting a game ball and a first attached to the upper surface of the unit case 2111. The moving port sensor 2104, the first attacker solenoid, the first big prize winning port sensor 2114 and the start port unit relay board 2115 which relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the lower part of the unit case 2111 are attached to the first big. And a starter unit decoration board (not shown) for decorating the winning opening 2005 with light emission.

  The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 opens upward with a size that can receive only one game ball at a time. The first grand prize opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 is open to the front with a size that allows a plurality of (for example, four to six) game balls to be received at a time.

  The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002 formed by a ball receiving portion 2102 that is open upward. After being guided downward on the rear side of 2101 and detected by the first start port sensor 2104, the first attacker unit 2110 can be passed through and discharged downward. In the present embodiment, two first start port sensors 2104 are provided. When the two first start port sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range on the main control board 1310, the first start port sensor 2104 is provided. It is determined in 2002 that a game ball has been accepted. As a result, it is possible to detect an illegal act due to an unauthorized insertion of a tool into the first start port 2002.

  In the start port unit 2100, the first big prize winning door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is opened to the unit base 2101 by attaching the first attacker unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101. The first big prize opening 2005 is closed by being inserted into the mouth 2005 from behind. The first grand prize opening door member 2112 is mounted in an upright state in which the first big prize opening 2005 is closed, and the left and right ends of the lower side are rotatably attached by the unit case 2111. The first big prize opening 2005 can be changed from a closed state to an open state by rotating the head so as to move downward.

  The first big prize opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 stands upright in a normal state (a state where the first attacker solenoid 2113 is not energized) and closes the first big prize opening 2005. When the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the gaming state, the first big prize opening door member 2112 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side is slightly higher than the lower side. It will be in the position. That is, the first grand prize opening door member 2112 is inclined so as to become higher from the lower side of the first big prize opening 2005 toward the front.

  In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first grand prize opening 2005 and contacts the first big prize opening door member 2112, the distribution direction of the game balls is changed from below by the inclination of the first big prize opening door member 2112. It changes to the rear, is accepted into the first grand prize opening 2005 and enters the unit case 2111. The game balls received in the first grand prize opening 2005 are detected by the first big prize opening sensor 2114 and then discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111.

[3. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effect devices in the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 and an upper plate liquid crystal based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls display of the effect image on the display device 244 and the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls the payout of the game ball and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the release of the game ball by rotating the handle lever 504.

[3-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 1311 that is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM 1313 that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM 1312 that temporarily stores data, and an input / output device (I Main control I / O port 1314 as a / O device), a main control input circuit 1315 to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1316 for driving various solenoids, and a main control A RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the MPU 1311. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1311 has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 includes a first start port sensor 2104 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2002, and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004. 2551, a general winning opening sensor 3015 for detecting a gaming ball received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2547 for detecting a gaming ball passing through the gate 2003, and a gaming ball received in the first big winning opening 2005 A first top prize opening sensor 2114, a second top prize opening 2006a as a second big prize opening 2006, and a second top prize opening sensor 2554 for detecting a game ball received in the second lower prize opening 2006b; Detecting illegal magnetism in the second lower prize winning opening sensor 2557, the discharge ball sensor 3060, the launch ball sensor 1020, and the game area 5a Magnetic detection sensor, the detection signal from the like are input via the respective main control I / O port 1314.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 1314 to the main control solenoid drive circuit, whereby the start port solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, and the second upper attacker. A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, or the first special symbol display, the second special symbol display, and the first special symbol memory of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port 1314. A drive signal is output to a display device, a second special symbol memory display device, a normal symbol display device, a normal symbol memory display device, a game state display device, a round display device, or the like.

  In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first big prize port sensor 2114, the second upper big prize port sensor 2554, and the second lower big prize port. The sensor 2557 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, while the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2003, so the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, And the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2547 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and long life are used for the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. Further, when an advantageous gaming state ("big hit" game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 are opened (or expanded), and the game balls are frequently played. In order to enter the game, detection of a game ball by the first big prize opening sensor 2114, the second upper big prize opening sensor 2554, and the second lower big prize opening sensor 2557 frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches having high durability and a long life are also used for the first big prize opening sensor 2114, the second upper big prize opening sensor 2554, and the second lower big prize opening sensor 2557. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3015 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2001 where game balls do not frequently enter. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning a prize opening sensor 3015.

  Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or Further, the main control MPU 1311 sends various commands related to control of game effects executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port 1314. To the peripheral control unit 1511. When receiving various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, the main control MPU 1311 shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board in the power supply board box 930. The power supply board for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. ). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1311 can store various types of information in the RAM 1312 in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 1312 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 951.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a drop in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 1311 via the main control I / O port 1314, the power failure notice signal is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

  An accessory ratio indicator 1317 is attached to the main control board 1310 at a position that is visible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The accessory ratio display 1317 displays the accessory ratio calculated by the main control MPU 1311.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with an accessory ratio display switch 1318. The accessory ratio display switch 1318 may be a push button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be another type of switch. When the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. In addition, the accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio, and the display content may be switched by operating the accessory ratio display switch 1318.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration within the main control MPU 1311.

  The main control MPU 1311 includes a CPU 13111, a RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, a random number generation circuit 13112, a parallel input port 13113, a serial communication circuit 13114, a timer circuit 13115, an interrupt controller 13116, an external bus interface 13117, a clock circuit 13118, a verification block 13119, Information 13120, an arithmetic circuit 13121, and a reset circuit 13122 are included.

  The CPU 13111 executes a program stored in the ROM 1313. The RAM 1312 stores data necessary for executing the program.

  The main control MPU 1311 is provided with one or more random number generation circuits 13112. The random number generation circuit 13112 provides a random number for determining the lottery result of the variable display game result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) and the effect of the variable display game.

  The parallel input port 13113 is a port to which detection signals from various detection switches are input via the main control input circuit 1315.

  The serial communication circuit 13114 transmits / receives various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to / from the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits / receives various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout of the game ball to and from the payout control board 951 via the main control I / O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits data for displaying the accessory ratio to the accessory ratio display 1317. The detailed configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The timer circuit 13115 is a timer for timer interruption and various time control. The interrupt controller 13116 controls various interrupts (general interrupt, NMI that cannot be masked by software) to the CPU 13111. That is, when the interrupt controller 13116 detects an interrupt, it refers to the vector table defined for each interrupt type and jumps to the address set in the vector table.

  The external bus interface 13117 is an interface for connecting the internal bus of the main control MPU 1311 to an external device. An I / O request (IORQ), read (RD), write (WR), 16-bit address (A0 to A15), and 8-bit data (D0 to D7) can be input / output from the external bus interface 13117.

  The clock circuit 13118 generates an internal clock of the main control MPU 1311 from the input external clock signal (for example, 32 MHz). The clock circuit 13118 divides the input clock signal by a set number and outputs it to the outside from the CLKO terminal. For example, a clock signal supplied to the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 27) of the accessory ratio display 1317 may be output.

  The verification block 13119 is a functional block for verifying whether the ROM 1313 has been tampered with using a predetermined code. The unique information 13120 is an ID unique to the main control MPU 1311 and is written in a non-rewritable manner when the chip is manufactured.

  The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function that does not depend on a program recorded in the ROM 1313. This calculation function is fixedly written when the chip is manufactured.

  The reset circuit 13122 has a non-designated travel prohibition circuit, a watchdog timer, and a user reset function. When the CPU 13111 accesses an address outside the predetermined address in the ROM 1313, the non-designated travel prohibition circuit estimates that the access is based on an unauthorized program and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The watchdog timer outputs a timeout signal when a predetermined timer time elapses, and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The user reset function resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311 by a reset signal input to the SRST terminal.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114.

  The serial communication circuit 13114 has four data transmission / reception circuits, and each data transmission / reception circuit transmits / receives data for one channel to / from a predetermined device. In FIG. 19, only the data transmission circuit is illustrated, and the description of the data reception circuit (for example, one channel is mounted) is omitted.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, as described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 is configured such that the channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, the channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, and the proportion of the objects. Three channels of channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the display 1317 are used, and channel 3 is unused.

  The serial communication circuit 13114 includes a data register 3141, a transmission data register 3142, a parity generation circuit 3143, a transmission shift register 3144, a command status register 3145, a communication setting register 3146, a transmission trigger setting level register 3147, a baud rate register 3148, and a baud rate generation circuit. 3149.

  Data input from the CPU 13111 is stored in the data register 3141 and then stored in the transmission data register 3142. The transmission data register 3142 is configured by a FIFO having a predetermined capacity (for example, 64 bytes). The transmission data register 3142 adds the error detection code generated by the parity generation circuit 3143 for each data transmission unit to the data to be transmitted, and stores it in the transmission shift register 3144.

  The baud rate generation circuit 3149 generates a transmission clock signal for transmitting data at a rate set in the baud rate register 3148 from the clock signal supplied from the clock circuit 13118. Then, the transmission shift register 3144 transmits data in accordance with the transmission clock signal.

  The command status register 3145 is a register referred to for confirming the transmission state.

  The communication setting register 3146 stores a command for controlling data transmission. The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 stores a threshold value for controlling the amount of data that causes the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 to generate an interrupt. The baud rate register 3148 stores a baud rate setting for defining a data transmission rate. The communication setting register 3146, the transmission trigger setting level register 3147, and the baud rate register 3148 are set for each of the four channels as initial settings in step S28 of FIG.

  Hereinafter, these settings will be described in detail. A communication format for each channel is set in the communication setting register. Specifically, the presence / absence of use of FIFO (FIFO mode, normal mode), the number of stop bits, and parity (whether parity is used, even parity or odd parity) are set. For example, in channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 and channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, the FIFO mode, the stop bit = 1 bit, and 1 × 1010B meaning even parity In channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317, the FIFO mode, the stop bit = 1 bit, and 1xxx1000B, which means that parity is not used, are set.

  In the FIFO mode, data is transmitted using the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. In addition, since the gaming machine is in a noisy environment, it is desirable to set a parity when transmitting data at a high speed outside the main control board 1310.

  Since the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the influence of noise is small as compared with communication with other boards via communication wires. Further, since the amount of data to be transmitted / received is small, the communication speed may be low and the need to use parity is scarce. In addition, along the pattern for transmitting a signal between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 (for example, the right and left and / or the thickness direction of the signal line provided on the surface or inner layer of the printed board) A layer adjacent to the ground pattern) is provided with a ground pattern, and noise superimposed on the signal transmission pattern can be reduced by the shielding effect of the ground pattern.

  The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 determines the amount of data that causes the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 to generate an interrupt. Specifically, when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the set number of bytes, a predetermined bit of the status register corresponding to each channel is set. By determining the bit of the status register, it can be confirmed whether or not the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 has a free space, and the transmission timing of the data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 can be determined.

  Note that the bit of the status register can be used to determine whether there is an abnormality in the transmission FIFO. For example, even if data is not written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 for a predetermined period, if the bit of the status register is not set, the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 does not have an empty space. Error processing (for example, error notification) may be executed by determining that data is not transmitted from the FIFO.

  The baud rate register 3148 determines the data transmission rate. For example, 19200 bps is set for channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, 1200 bps is set for channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. In channel 2 used for communication with the network, 1200 bps is set.

  Thus, the transmission rate is changed according to the data transmitted on each channel. This is because the game ball is rolling inside the gaming machine, and the electronic circuit of the gaming machine is susceptible to noise. For this reason, data is transmitted to the payout control board 951 at a low speed so that the data for controlling the outgoing ball directly related to the profit given to the player is reliably transmitted. On the other hand, since the peripheral control board 1510 has a large amount of data to be transmitted and is not related to the outgoing ball, it transmits data at a high rate. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 verifies whether the received command is abnormal. If it is determined that the command is abnormal, the peripheral control board 1510 does not operate the peripheral control board 1510 or executes an abnormal process (for example, communication error notification). Request retransmission of. When it is determined that the retransmitted command is normal, the state of the peripheral control board 1510 is restored using the normal command. For this reason, communication with the peripheral control board 1510 can transmit data at a high rate. Further, if the communication rate with the peripheral control board 1510 is lowered, the player can recognize the delay from the winning of the start opening to the start of the change of the symbol, and there is a possibility that the interest is lowered.

  Communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is performed at a high rate (19200 bps, which is a data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510), or at a low rate (1200 bps, which is a data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). Good. In addition, the communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is performed at a high rate (19200 bps which is a data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) and a low rate (1200 bps which is a data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). A rate between and may be used. If the data transmission rate is increased, this may cause malfunction in other circuits due to switching noise of transistors of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the data transmitted due to noise, the same data is retransmitted for each timer interrupt unless the transmitted data is updated. If the retransmitted command is normal, the contents displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 This is because it is not necessary to make the transmission rate extremely low.

The command status register 3145 is a register referred to for confirming the transmission state. For example, each bit is defined as follows.
Bit 7: SnTC is a flag indicating completion of transmission. 0 indicates that transmission is in progress and 1 indicates completion of transmission.
Bit 6: SnTDBE In the normal mode (communication mode not using FIFO), a flag indicating transmission data empty, 0 indicates no transfer to the transmission shift register, and 1 indicates transfer to the transmission shift register. That is, it is set when data is transferred from the transmission data register 3142 to the transmission shift register 3144 and no transmission data is stored in the transmission data register 3142.

In the SnTTTL FIFO mode, this is a flag indicating the transmission FIFO trigger level. 0 is the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is greater than or equal to the trigger level, 1 is stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 The amount of transmitted data is below the trigger level. That is, it is set when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the number of bytes set in the transmission trigger level setting register. Therefore, at the time of communication in the FIFO mode, after confirming that the bit is 1, data is written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.
Bits 5 to 2: Not used (fixed to 0)
Bit 1: SnTCL This bit is used to clear the transmission buffer and break code transmission, empty transmission data, or set the transmission FIFO trigger level (SnTFL), and is written from the outside. For example, when the contents of the buffer are forcibly cleared, 1 is set to the bit. More specifically, the command is written in the FIFO, but is used when transmission of the written command is stopped due to some circumstances (for example, occurrence of an abnormality). Even if bit 1 is set, the data in the transmission shift register is not cleared.

  With the configuration described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 can perform asynchronous communication (asynchronous communication), but outputs a clock signal for synchronous communication (not shown). In this case, the clock signal supplied to the communication partner (driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317) is output from the serial communication circuit 13114 instead of the clock circuit 13118. Each transmission / reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 13114 may be capable of synchronous communication by setting at least one channel, or may be provided with a serial communication circuit for asynchronous communication and a serial communication circuit for synchronous communication.

  Although not shown, the serial communication circuit 13114 outputs a signal (LOAD) indicating data capture timing used during synchronous communication.

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
Returning to FIG. 17, the description of the control configuration of the pachinko machine will be continued. The payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls and the like is not shown in detail, but performs a discharge control by a payout control unit 952 for performing various controls relating to payout and a launch solenoid 682, and a ball by a ball feed solenoid 551. A launch control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED indicator that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that cancels an error displayed on the error LED indicator, a ball tank 802, a tank rail 803, a ball guidance unit 820, and a ball removal switch for discharging the game balls in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[3-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 952 that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 951 is not shown in detail, but a micro that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the apparatus 830, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU has a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, the ball breakage detection sensor 827, the payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

  Detection signals from the ball break detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port. The

  Further, detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A command for outputting to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Or the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board via the payout control I / O port. This external terminal board is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the numeral “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the payout device 830, and when the number “2” is displayed, it is “ball check” (specifically, the blade Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, it is informed that the payout vane and the game ball are engaged in the payout passage of the payout device 830 and the payout vane is difficult to rotate), and the number “3” is displayed. Is a "counting switch error" (Specifically, a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842), and when the number “5” is displayed, it is a “retry error”. (Specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full” (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535, the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 520 is informed that the game ball is full), and when the number “7” is displayed, “CR not connected” (Electrical connection is cut off at any point from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and when the number “9” is displayed, it is “in stock” ( Ingredients Manner to have informed yet that the ball number of game balls no payout has reached a predetermined number of balls).

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial manner, and this signal is received at the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU. Is done. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining level on the display unit. Entered and displayed.

[3-2b. Launch control unit]
A launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 551 is omitted in detail, but a launch control input to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a based on the clock signal, and the firing reference pulse A launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 682, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 551 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 game balls are fired toward the game area 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. A ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 500, a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle lever 504, and a stop that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal from the button is input to the firing timing control circuit after being input to the firing control input circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  This firing solenoid drive circuit receives, based on a signal from the handle operation sensor 507, a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle lever 504. In response to this, it outputs to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 551 when the ball feed reference pulse is input, thereby playing the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 into the ball. One ball is received in the feeding unit 540, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball is sent to the ball launcher 680 side by stopping the output of the constant current. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 682 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

  The power supply board for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 even when the power is shut off in the power-off process. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated at power-on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. And a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

[3-3a. Peripheral control unit]
A peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. And a sound ROM in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

  The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each peripheral board of the game board 5 is received based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to the effect driving board 3043, or the gaming board The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board to the effect drive board 3043, or the door Door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a vibration device 242 or a door lower right drive motor 272 provided in the frame 3, and each device of the door frame 3 Door-side drive light emission data composed of door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on the substrate is used as a frame decoration drive board serial I / O. Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted from the port to the door frame 3 side or displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 from the liquid crystal control unit serial I / O port. In addition to transmitting to 1512, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

  Detection signals from various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of the various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. . Further, detection signals from the touch panel 246 and the effect button pressing sensor 258 of the effect operation unit 220 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and based on this operation signal, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 The operation is monitored.

  The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and plays music and music adapted to various effects from the speakers 921 provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. Control is performed so that sound effects and the like flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding backward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is accommodated. In the present embodiment, an acoustic signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or By transmitting a 4.1ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound production) than before.

  In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built in the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). In combination with WDT, it is diagnosed whether its own system is running away.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km ( k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, a plurality of data different from the initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body driving command, and display command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

  The effect driving board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or the received gaming board side lighting / flashing command. The lighting signal or the flashing signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decorative board provided in the game board 5.

  In addition, the effect drive board 3043 sends a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration device 242 and the door lower right drive motor 272 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, etc. Or output to

[3-3b. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 17 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU first performs a process of initializing itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU is initialized in a very short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU enters a state in which interrupt permission is set. For example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, the peripheral control MPU outputs commands from the main control board 1310 and pachinko machines related to the control of game effects. Various commands such as commands relating to the state of the machine 1 can be received.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time and time information specifying hour, minute and second are acquired from the RTC control unit, and the calendar information storage unit as current calendar information is acquired in the peripheral control RAM. And set in the time information storage unit as the current time information.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the effect control program sets a value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later. Is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed in response to the input of a V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be received. The value 1 is set in the interrupt process. In step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG.

  Subsequent to step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, a value 1 is first set to the steady process flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a later-described peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, and the number of times this 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the peripheral I / O port serial transmission is performed by using the peripheral control DMA controller of the peripheral control MPU.

  Subsequent to step S1012, the effect control program performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In the effect operation unit monitoring process, the operation button 220C is operated based on detection signals from various detection switches 258 provided in the effect operation unit 220 in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later. Based on the various information obtained, the presence / absence of operation of the operation button 220C is monitored, and it is determined as appropriate whether or not the operation state of the operation button 220C is reflected in the game effect.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the drawing data for one screen (for one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the built-in sound source VDP by the display data creation process described later is displayed on the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side. Output to the decorative substrate 233. Thereby, various screens are drawn on the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the production control program outputs the sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP in the sound data creation process described later to the speaker 921 and notifies in addition to the music and sound effects. Sound data such as sound and notification sound is output to the speaker 921.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the peripheral control RAM. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, in order to instruct which screen data from the top screen data is output to the sound source built-in VDP, Update the pointer.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct the number of light emission data from the top light emission data to be used as the light emission modes of various LEDs among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. , Update the pointer.

  In addition, in the scheduler update process, the first sound among the sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound command data for instructing sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The pointer is updated to indicate what sound command data is output from the command data to the VDP with built-in sound source.

  In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data, the number of the drive data from the head drive data is output. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to do so.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the effect control program performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program is information transmitted from the game board side decorative board 3053 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, which will be described later in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command The receiving unit) analyzes various commands received (command analyzing unit).

  Subsequent to step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into predetermined notification displays, various abnormality notifications are issued. The peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 stores screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like set in the abnormal display mode for execution. Alternatively, it is extracted from the peripheral control RAM and set in the peripheral control RAM. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transitioned to. It is supposed to be. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above is classified into the status display shown in FIG. For example, an error canceling navigation command (second error canceling command), for example, a game board side decorative board 3053 (effect device) ), Visually warning the outside using the door frame side decorative board 233 (effect device) and lamp (effect device), or audibly warning the outside using a speaker (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player tries to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch of the payout control board 951 despite being in the gaming state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to warn the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

  Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program is stored in the calendar information and time information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the peripheral control RAM and stored in the calendar information storage unit. Update the time information. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute and second as time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated, and the year and month as calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Peripheral control of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 based on the light emission data to be performed It is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the unit 1511, set in the peripheral control RAM, and lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is stored in the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral Was created by extracting from your RAM, it is set to peripheral control RAM.

  Subsequent to step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation. Are extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, thereby creating a game board side decorative board 3053. And drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the door frame side decorative board 233 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the pointer indicates the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM and controls the sound source by controlling the sound source. In addition to incorporating sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number defined in the data, an output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the production control program copies and backs up the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the peripheral control RAM externally attached to the backup first area and the backup second area, The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM externally attached to the peripheral control MPU are copied and backed up in the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively.

  Subsequent to step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting value 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until value 1 is set in V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until a value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, processing in steps S1009 to S1038 is performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”.

  The peripheral control unit steady process starts from the fact that the effect control program first sets the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG, assuming that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. An interrupt timer activation process is performed, and each process of steps S1012, S1014,..., And step S1036 is performed. Set to to complete. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when the V blank signal that indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above. The interval at which is inputted is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

  Next, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be received as shown in FIG. 60 is input from the VDP with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. It is set to a value of 0 when execution of the process is completed.

  If the steady process flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, this routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process. When the part steady process is not executed, the value is set to 0.

  Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 59 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 as shown in FIG. S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above. The interval at which is inputted is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, then the second,... Will occur.

  When the number of 1 ms timer interrupt executions STN is not smaller than 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. In the present embodiment, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next V blank signal generation, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding 1 to this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, pointers out of drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU and the peripheral control RAM. In accordance with the drive data instructed by the motor, an electric drive source such as various motors and solenoids is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and each time this motor and solenoid drive process is executed, Update the pointer.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5 are input, thereby detecting history information of detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, original position history information). , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM, the original positions and the movable positions of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

  Subsequent to step S1106, an effect operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 220 are input, thereby detecting history information of detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, operation Button 220C operation history information) is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. Whether or not the operation button 220C is operated can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM.

  Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the door frame side effect receiver IC of the door frame side decorative substrate 233 is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the door frame side decorative substrate 233 is abnormal data. If it is determined, it is a signal that is output to convey the fact.

  Subsequent to step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM are copied and backed up to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM are backed up. Copy to 1 area and backup 2nd area to backup.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the power-on process of the peripheral control unit in FIG. 59, various processes relating to the effects in steps S1012 to S1032 described above are performed as the progress of the effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to occur before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt. The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is newly performed by the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  In addition, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233, and the peripheral control MPU and the sound source built-in VDP are mounted. Even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change somewhat. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[3-4. Liquid crystal display controller]
Next, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 on the peripheral control board 1510 is not illustrated in detail, but as a microprocessor. Display control MPU, display control ROM for storing various processing programs, various commands and various data, VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) for controlling display of main liquid crystal display device 1600 and upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, and main liquid crystal Image ROM for storing various screen data displayed on display device 1600, sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and upper liquid crystal display device 244, and image RAM to which various data stored in this image ROM are transferred and copied And.

  The display control MPU includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the main liquid crystal display device 1600, Drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is performed. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The display control ROM includes control programs (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 in addition to various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. And a plurality of schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) and non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding thereto. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data for defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is defined. Has been. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in time series. The non-resident area transfer data includes various screen data drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 according to the progress of the schedule data in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The order in which data is transferred is specified.

  The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then displays the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

  When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input to the VDP, the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate are extracted. Drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. In addition, when the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. To do. The VDP employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer system”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 is held in the line buffer. In this method, the held drawing data for one line is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

  The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored. This affects the drawing speed on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper liquid crystal display device 244. For example, when various persons (characters) are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper liquid crystal display device 244, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. As a result, when displaying a plurality of persons on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set in a vertical relationship (hereinafter referred to as “sprite superposition order”) when the sprites are arranged on the screen or when the sprites overlap with each other, and are set in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub liquid crystal display device. 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 are drawn.

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “sprite character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed by using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in horizontal 2 × vertical 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 sequentially perform main scanning that sets the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixel from the left to the right when viewed from the front. And sub-scanning in which main scanning is repeated in a direction crossing the one direction. When the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 receive the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, When viewed from the front of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the pixels are sequentially output to the pixels for one line from left to right. When the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line immediately below as the sub-scan, and similarly, drawing data for the next line is input. Then, on the basis of the drawing data for the next line, one line is sequentially applied from the left to the right as viewed from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 as main scanning. Output to each minute pixel.

[4. Game contents]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 10, FIG. 16, FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is obtained when the player rotates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 disposed in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the strength of the game. The game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the game ball can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. That is, a game ball can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) with a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions are implanted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). By abutting, the flow-down speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

  When a game ball that has been thrown into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front surface of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500 from the highest position, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down while abutting on the center. Then, when the game ball flowing down the left region of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 that is opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory passes through the warp passage 2521. The warp outlet 2522 opened in the frame of 2500 is supplied to the stage 2530 through the guide path 2523.

  The game ball supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and the central guiding portion 2531 at the center in the left-right direction or the side guiding portions 2532 at the left and right thereof. From either of them. When a game ball is released from the central guiding portion 2531 of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, the central guiding portion 2531 is located immediately above the first start port 2002, and thus the game released from the central guiding portion 2531. The ball is received at the first start port 2002 with a high probability. When a game ball is received at the first start port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from the side guide portion 2532 into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the opened first big winning port 2005, or the like.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is drawn toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2302 of the upper side unit 2300, and the general winning opening of the lower side unit 2200 There is a possibility of being received in 2001, the first start port 2002, or the like. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  On the other hand, in the game area 5a, a game ball that is driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters (is driven into) the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500. ) And enters the right upper distribution space 2541 of the right hit game area 2540. In the upper right circulation space 2541, although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted, and a game ball abuts against the obstacle nails and circulates while changing the flow direction in various ways. In the upper right circulation space 3541, a gate portion 2003 is provided at the upper portion, and a second start opening 2004 that is closed by a general winning opening 2001 and a second start opening door member 2549 is provided at the lower portion.

  The game ball that has flowed down in the upper right circulation space 2541 enters the lower right circulation space 2543 through the right flow passage 2542 on the downstream side. The game balls that have entered the lower right circulation space 2543 are the second upper prize opening that closes the second upper prize winning opening 2006a and the second lower prize winning opening 2006b, which are lined up on the left and right as the second prize winning opening 2006. The upper surface of the door member 2552 and the second lower grand prize opening door member 2555 passes through the second attacker passage 2543a that forms the bottom surface, and enters the game area 5a from the left end of the lower discharge plate portion 2559 on the left side when viewed from the front. Released. The downstream end (release plate portion 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball is directed to the first big prize opening 2005 of the start opening unit 2100, and the first big prize opening 2005 is open. When a game ball is released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, the game ball is received at the first big prize opening 2005 with a high probability.

  The game balls flowing through the right flow path 2542 and the lower right flow space 2543 flow down while the increase in the flow speed is suppressed by the plurality of speed reduction ribs 2546. In rare cases, the lower right circulation space 2543 may enter the discharge passage 2543b branched near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a, and the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b is played in the game area 5a. It is discharged out of the game board 5 from the second out port 2543c without being returned to the inside.

  When a game ball that hits the right and enters the upper right circulation space 2541 passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, it is a normal random number that is updated in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. A normal lottery is performed by obtaining one ordinary random number from the list and comparing the obtained ordinary random number with a predetermined ordinary hit determination table. If the result of the normal lottery is “normal hit” when the time reduction control described later is not executed, the second start port door member 2549 rotates once in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the second start port 2004 is opened, and a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time-shortening control is being executed, it is determined whether the “normal hit” is “first normal hit”, “second normal hit”, or “third normal hit” in the normal lottery. If the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is “first normal hit”, “second normal hit”, or “third normal hit” when the time-shortening control is being executed, the second start port door member 2549 By turning in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front and opening the second start port 2004, the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 for a predetermined period of time. Opening / closing control is made a predetermined number of times (in this example, 5) by turning counterclockwise and closing the second starting port 2004 so that the game ball cannot be received in the second starting port 2004. ) Times. In addition, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery becomes “per 1st normal”, the second start port 2004 is set to be in a state where the game ball can be received, and “0.3 second” is set as the five periods. , “0.28 seconds”, “0.3 seconds”, “0.28 seconds”, “0.3 seconds”, and the normal lottery result of the normal lottery becomes “per second ordinary” The second start port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be received five times, “0.3 seconds”, “0.28 seconds”, “1.1 seconds”, “0.28 seconds”. When the normal lottery result of the normal lottery becomes “per third ordinary”, the second starting port 2004 is allowed to accept game balls. The period is “0.3 second”, “0.28 second”, “0.3 second”, “0.28 second”, “1.1 second”, “per second ordinary” and “third ordinary” Ri "In advantageous to the player than the" first normal per "has become a (acceptance of game balls to the second start-up port 2004 is easy) Atari. When a game ball is received at the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The

  In the present embodiment, in the normal symbol variation display performed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the passing of the game ball through the gate part 2003, the normal symbol variation display is started after the normal symbol variation display is started. A certain amount of time is set until the stop display is made (until the normal lottery result is suggested) (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). At the second start port 2004, the second start port door member 2549 is rotated and opened after the normal variation time has elapsed. In addition, during execution of the time-shortening control which will be described later, control for shortening the normal variation time is executed as compared with normal (a state where time-shortening control is not executed). Further, the opening time for turning the second start port door member 2549 to open the second start port 2004 may be changed according to the gaming state. For example, time reduction control is executed. If not, the opening time of the second start port 2004 may be changed to a longer time than when the time-shortening control is executed.

  In addition, after the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, until a normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display is stopped (until the normal lottery result is suggested), a new game ball is added to the gate unit. After passing 2003, the normal symbol display cannot be started again on the normal symbol display. Therefore, the normal symbol change display is started until the previous normal symbol change display ends (the normal lottery result). Until the suggestion is over). Specifically, the normal random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 by the gate sensor 2547 is stored, and the normal symbol variation display can be started. Until normal symbols change display starts. It should be noted that the number of ordinary random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is limited to 4 and the upper limit is discarded even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 without being retained. . This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball received in the first start port 2002 is detected by the first start port sensor 2104, the main control board 1310 is updated within a predetermined numerical range. An advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”) is obtained by acquiring one first special random number from one special random number and comparing the obtained first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table. , “Small hit”, etc.) are generated for the first special lottery result. Then, the first special lottery result after the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display are controlled to blink over a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds) based on the lottery first special lottery result. The first special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying it in a lighting mode according to (displaying the stop symbol corresponding to the first special lottery result after variably displaying the first special symbol). Note that the first special lottery results that are drawn when the game balls are received at the first starting port 2002 include “out of”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “8R big hit”, and “10R big hit”. Yes, by comparing the acquired first special random number with the jackpot determination table, it is determined which of these is, and after the jackpot game is normal (low probability state: in this example with a probability of about 1/395) Probability improvement control (high probability state (also called probabilistic state): wins the jackpot with a probability of about 44/44 in this example) that improves the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) than winning the jackpot) Whether or not to execute (whether or not it is a promising big hit), and whether or not to execute time-short control (time-short state) that shortens the fluctuation time more than usual when the result of the first special lottery is off And short-time control Period to execute: a (time-reduction times special symbol (number of times of the change in the first special punching pattern and the second special symbol)), so that also is determined. Note that the winning probability of “small hit” is always constant regardless of the gaming state (in this example, about 1/300).

  Further, when a game ball received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310 is selected. The second special random number is acquired, and the acquired second special random number is collated with a predetermined jackpot determination table to obtain an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit”, “small hit”, etc. ) To generate the second special lottery result. Then, the second special lottery result after the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds) based on the lottery second special lottery result. The second special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying it in a lighting mode according to (displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the second special lottery result after variably displaying the second special symbol). In addition, the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting a game ball at the second starting port 2004 includes “out of”, “2R big hit”, “4R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “6R big hit”, There are “7R jackpot”, “8R jackpot”, and “16R jackpot”, which is determined by comparing the acquired second special random number with the jackpot determination table. Low probability state: In this example, the probability improvement control (high probability state (also referred to as probabilistic state)) that improves the probability of winning a big hit (winning probability) rather than a win of about 395 in this example: this example (If you win a big hit with a probability of about 1/44) or not (whether it is a promising big hit or not), and at least if the second special lottery result is out of time, the time-saving control to shorten the fluctuation time than usual (Short time ) Is executed (whether or not it is a short and large hit) and the time period during which the time reduction control is executed (the number of time reductions: special symbol (the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate)) It has become.

  When the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by accepting game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state After the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the 8 LEDs of the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are displayed in a lighting manner according to the special lottery result, and then the first grand prize opening Either 2005 or the second grand prize winning hole 2006 is in a state where a game ball can be received in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 when the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is in an open state, the payout device is provided by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. A predetermined number of game balls from 830 (for example, 11 if a game ball is received in the first grand prize opening 2005 or 15 if a game ball is accepted in the second big prize opening 2006). Is dispensed to the upper plate 201. Accordingly, when the first grand prize opening 2005 and the second major prize opening 2006 are capable of receiving game balls, the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2006 accept many game balls. The ball can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

  When the result of the special lottery is “small hit” or “2R big hit”, the first big prize opening 2005 will play the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern that is closed after the accepting open state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery results are "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit" A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after 2005 or the second grand prize opening 2006 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received, or the first big prize opening 2005 is predetermined. If any of the following conditions are satisfied: a number (for example, 7) of game balls are received or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are received in the second big prize opening 2006 Then, an opening / closing pattern (a single opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) for making the game ball in an unacceptable closed state is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated by repeating four rounds for “4R big hit”, five rounds for “5R big hit”, and 16 rounds for “16R big hit”. In addition, the opening / closing pattern (the first big prize opening 2005 is a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) executed when the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit”. In the meantime, in the open / close pattern in which the game ball is opened after being opened, the game ball is substantially difficult to enter the first big prize opening 2005. On the other hand, when the special lottery results are "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit" (A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received, or the first big prize opening 2005 Either a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls is received or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is received in the second big prize opening 2006. If such a condition is satisfied, it is easy to enter the game ball into the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2006 in an open / close pattern in which the game ball is in an unacceptable closed state). If the special lottery results are "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit" A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the mouth 2005 or the second grand prize opening 2006 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received, or the first big prize opening 2005 is determined in advance. Either a certain number (for example, seven) of game balls is accepted, or a predetermined number (for example, ten) of game balls is accepted into the second grand prize winning opening 2006 is satisfied. Then, the number of rounds in which the opening / closing pattern for closing the game ball to be unacceptable is executed may be a substantial special lottery result. 7) If any of the conditions for accepting a game ball or accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls into the second grand prize opening 2006 is satisfied, the closed ball that cannot accept the game ball is closed. Open / close pattern to be set and open / close pattern executed when the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big win” (the first big prize opening 2005 is a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds) And an opening / closing pattern in which the game ball is opened after being opened and can be closed) may be provided. For example, as a result of the special lottery, “8R big hit that is substantially 4R” is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls are accepted into the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening If any of the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is received in 2006 is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern for closing the game balls in an unacceptable state is repeated four times. Opening and closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is “small hit” or “2R big hit” (the first big prize opening 2005 is for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds), The opening / closing pattern that is closed after the game ball can be received may be repeated four times.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the second big prize opening 2006 is composed of a second upper big prize opening 2006a and a second lower big prize opening 2006b arranged in the left and right, and the second big prize winning opening 2006 is used. In the case of “big hit”, for example, in the first round (1R), the second upper prize opening 2006a is opened to accept the game ball, and it is closed by satisfying the condition that the game ball cannot be accepted, and then accepted. Until the second lower big prize opening 2006b is opened and the next round (2R) that allows the reception of game balls is started, and the second lower big prize opening 2006b becomes unacceptable, Since the interval has passed in the meantime, the second upper prize winning opening 2006a is opened again to allow the game ball to be received. Then, the second upper big prize opening 2006a and the second lower big prize opening 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds are consumed. Thereby, in the second attacker passage 2543a, during the “big hit”, either the second upper prize winning port 2006a or the second lower major prize winning port 2006b is in a state where it can receive the game ball. When the player hits the right and distributes the game ball in the second attacker passage 2543a, the game ball is surely received in the second big prize opening 2006, and the player can entertain the player without missing the game ball. Can do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of some of the above-mentioned types of big hits, whether or not to execute the time-shortening control after completion of the big hit game is made different depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit. For example, when the first special lottery result is an 8R normal big hit that does not execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game in the non-time-short state (the state where the time reduction control is not executed), the short time control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is 8R normal big hit in the time-short state (state where time-short control is executed), the time-short control is executed after the big hit game. Further, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit that does not execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game in the non-time saving state (the state where the time reduction control is not executed), the short time control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit in the time saving state (the state in which the time reduction control is executed), the time reduction control is executed after the big hit game. In addition, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are executed after the big hit game in the low-probability non-short-time state (both probability improvement control and time-shortage control are not executed: also referred to as normal state). In the case of 2R probability variable big hit, the time-shortening control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, in the state where the probability improvement control is being executed or the time reduction control is being executed, that is, in the state other than the normal state, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game. In the case of a big hit, the short time control is executed after the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol change display executed by the first special symbol display by the reception of the game ball at the first start port 2002 and the reception of the game ball at the second start port 2004 are the first. The change display of the second special symbol executed by the two special symbol indicators is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol indicator is stopped and displayed (the first special lottery result is suggested) by receiving the game ball at the first starting port 2002 and The first start until the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display by receiving the game ball at the second start port 2004 is stopped (until the second special lottery result is suggested). When a new game ball is received at the mouth 2002 or the second start opening 2004, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display starts to display the first special symbol or the second special symbol variable display. Since it is not possible to change the display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) until the end of the variable symbol display of the first special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) (first special lottery) Until the results and suggestions for the second special lottery are complete ) Is set to be pending. More specifically, the first special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received by the first start port 2002 by the first start port sensor 2104, and the second start port sensor 2551. And the second special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 by the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) The variable display start of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until it becomes possible to start the variable display of symbols. In addition, the upper limit of the number of first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is limited to 4 respectively. Even if the ball is accepted, it is discarded without being put on hold. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold. The first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are digested with priority given to the second special random number. That is, if the second special random number is stored and the start of the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended regardless of the timing of accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the symbol.

  This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) and the main liquid crystal display 1600 (the sub liquid crystal display 3114 may also be used). The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is that the above eight LEDs constituting the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are turned on / off repeatedly for a predetermined time. It blinks and then stops in a predetermined lighting mode, and a special lottery result is suggested by a combination of LEDs that are lit at the time of the stop.

  On the other hand, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on control signals (variation pattern command, determination result notification command, etc.) from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is displayed by the effect image. Suggestions are made. Specifically, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a series of decorative symbol sequences composed of a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a state where a plurality of columns (for example, three columns of a left decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a right decorative symbol) are displayed. The display of the decorative symbol sequence is started, and then it is stopped in sequence (in this example, it is displayed in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol), and finally all decorative symbol sequences are stopped. When displayed, a lottery result of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed is suggested to the player side. In other words, depending on the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) acquired when the start prize is generated, a plurality of decorative symbol sequences fluctuate. An effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest a special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) after being displayed is displayed. The decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is better than the first special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display. Since it is large and easy to see, the player generally pays attention to the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the symbol string fluctuates to confirm the image) The time until the function display unit 1400 is set to be shorter.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative body of the center object 2500, The interior decoration unit 3050, the back bottom movable movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. are used as appropriate. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

[5. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, processing executed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. Specifically, a system / user reset process executed at power-on of the gaming machine and a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined period (4 ms in the present embodiment) by a timer activated by the system / user reset process explain.

[5-1. Initialization process]
20 and 21 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the initialization process of the main control board in the embodiment of the present invention.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform initialization processing. When the initialization process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and allows the writing to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Specifically, “00H” indicating write permission is output to the RAM protect register.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates a built-in watchdog timer (step S12). Specifically, first, “03H” indicating mode setting is written to the watchdog timer control register, and “03H” indicating activation of the watchdog timer is further written. Further, the watchdog timer is cleared and reset (step S14).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether a predetermined wait time has elapsed (step S16). Since the voltage does not rise immediately after turning on the power of the gaming machine 1 until it reaches the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. A power failure warning signal is input. In the wait process, a predetermined monitoring wait value is set, and the process is waited for a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds) while starting the watchdog timer.

  If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated since the time required for starting the sub board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) has passed (step S18). . When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the work ratio calculation work area (function ratio calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is deleted (step S30). ), And proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch has not been operated, the data backed up in the internal RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20). The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the power source of the gaming machine 1 is shut off through normal processing such as the occurrence of a power failure (see step S56 in FIG. 21).

  As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 may be incorrect, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power shutdown and the step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

  As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data does not match the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may be incorrect. The portion other than the combination ratio calculation area 13128 is deleted (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data matches the checksum stored in step S48, the data in the work area of the internal RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and step S24 is executed. Proceed to

  Subsequently, it is determined by using the check code whether or not the work ratio calculation work area (function ratio calculation area 13128) is normal (step S24). If it is determined that there is an abnormality, the data in the work item ratio calculation work area may be incorrect, so the data stored in the work item ratio calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

  When one or a plurality of backup areas are provided in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined using a check code. If the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup area 1 The data in the backup area, which is determined in the order of 2, N, and first determined to be normal may be copied to the main area. Thereafter, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is.

  In addition to the check code judgment result when the power is turned on for the accessory ratio calculation area, the accessory ratio is calculated every predetermined time separately from the check code judgment result when the power is turned on. The data in the calculation area 13128 may be deleted. In addition, for each predetermined operating amount (for example, every predetermined number of shot balls, every predetermined number of winning balls, every predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, every bonus game of a predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, etc.) The data in the ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is different for each data type (the game control data 13132 and the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136). Erase by condition. That is, by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control data 13132 is erased, but the backed-up character ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not erased. If the character ratio calculation / display data 13136 can be deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the character ratio calculated by the gaming machine 1 can be deleted at an arbitrary timing. For this reason, the backed-up character ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, and the erase of the character ratio calculation / display data 13136 by the operation of the game hall staff is prevented. , It is possible to prevent the concealment of the state where the ratio of the accessory is abnormal. For this reason, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine remodeled to a state where the ratio of the accessory is high or low.

  The main control MPU 1311 executes initial setting for setting in various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU) when the power recovery setting of the RAM work area or the RWM initialization process is executed (step S28). In the initial setting of the main control MPU 1311, first, a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) is initially set and an interrupt is permitted. Further, the serial communication port and test signal output port are initialized. Start the hardware random number generation circuit. Then, the serial communication circuit 13114 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, the payout control board 951, and the accessory ratio display 1317 is set. Further, after the operation of the serial communication circuit 13114 is started, the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is initialized.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes processing for setting a power-on command for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S32). In the power-on command creation process, game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. In generating a power-on command, a power-on state reference command is set as reference command data, and command addition data corresponding to the command to be generated is added.

  The power-on command includes a power-on state buffer command and a special symbol / electrical accessory action number command. The power-on state buffer command is a command for notifying the gaming state at the time of return after power-off, and notifies the winning probability of the special lottery and the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory. On the other hand, the special symbol / electric accessory action number command notifies the execution status of the special symbol variable display.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 1311 permits execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing (step S34). The initial setting of the gaming machine 1 is completed by the processing from power-on of the gaming machine 1 to step S34 (initial setting means).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure notice signal (step S36), and determines whether or not the power failure notice signal is ON (step S38). If the power failure notice signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is “No”), that is, random number update processing is executed (step S40). In the random number update process of step S46, random numbers other than the random numbers for performing the winning determination mainly in the special lottery or the normal lottery are updated. Note that the random number update process for performing the winning determination in the special lottery or the normal lottery is executed by a timer interrupt process to be described later. The processes from step S36 to step S40 are executed until a power failure notice signal is detected, and these processes are set as main processes on the main control side (normal means after initial setting).

  On the other hand, when a power failure notice signal is detected (the result of step S38 is “Yes”), the main control MPU 1311 executes a power-off process (power-off setting means). In the power-off process, a process for backing up data for returning to the state before the occurrence of the power failure is executed. Specifically, first, the execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42). As a result, timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM 1312 can be prevented, and rewriting of game information can be protected. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S44). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is set to the solenoid / power failure clear / ACK output port. Note that not all output ports need to be cleared. For example, an output port for controlling a solenoid or motor that consumes a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, it is possible to reduce the power consumption of the time until the main board side power-off process is completed, and to reliably end the main board-side power-off process.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held (step S46). Further, the checksum calculation result is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 1312 (step S48). This checksum is used to determine whether the data backed up in the work area is normal.

  Subsequently, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data of the work item ratio calculation work area (the item ratio calculation region 13128) (step S50). When the check code is a fixed value, it is not necessary to calculate the check code in step S50. Note that the check code may be calculated and stored every time data is updated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process instead of the main board power-off process.

  Subsequently, the calculated check code (or a predetermined value used as the check code) is stored in a predetermined area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S52).

  Subsequently, the data of the main area of the work for calculating an accessory ratio (object ratio calculating area 13128) is copied to each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also copied. The backup may be performed as appropriate (for example, every time data is updated) not by the main board side power-off process but by the accessory ratio calculation / display process.

  In this way, by storing the data used for the calculation of the accessory ratio in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for calculating the accessory ratio is retained even when the power is shut off. In addition, it is possible to calculate the ratio of an accessory during long-term operation.

  Further, a value indicating that the backup is normally performed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S56). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed. Finally, by writing “01H” indicating that writing is prohibited to the RAM protect register, writing to the RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S58), and the system waits until recovery from a power failure (infinite loop).

[5-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt period (4 ms in the present embodiment) set in the initialization process shown in FIGS. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 in the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the register (step S70). The main control board 1310 in this embodiment has a bank 0 and a bank 1 and is switched and used every time a timer interrupt process is executed.

  Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes switch input processing (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, detection signals from various sensors that detect a game ball that has entered a winning opening such as a general winning opening, detection signals from a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraud using a magnet, and winning ball control processing The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 that informs the payout control board 951 that the payout control board 951 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in step S1 is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs timer update processing (step S76). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 is turned on in accordance with the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, which will be described later, the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on in accordance with the symbol variation display pattern, a payer ACK signal is transmitted to inform that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). Time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the signal is input is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes random number update processing 1 (step S78). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number and the small hits that are updated by the non-winning random number update process of step S50 in the system / user reset process (main control side main process) shown in the figure The initial random number for design determination is also updated.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes prize ball control processing (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created based on the read input information, or a board between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 Or create a self-check command to check the connection status between them. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payout serial data.

  Subsequently, the current gaming state is determined, the number of prize balls to be paid out as the gaming value is added to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and an accessory ratio calculation area 13128 in the main control built-in RAM 1312 (see FIG. 25). Is updated (step S81). The process of step S81 can be skipped when there is no prize ball to be paid out in step S80, and the load on the gaming machine 1 can be reduced.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a frame command reception process (step S82). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error canceling navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status display by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to that effect is sent to the payout control board 951 and stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312 as output information. In addition, the main control MPU 1311 shapes a command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame status display command, an error release notification command, etc.), and transmits the transmission information described above as transmission information. Store in the information storage area. In the prize ball discharge process, the number of prize balls discharged is recorded in a storage area (see FIG. 26) defined by the gaming state of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128.

  The bonus ratio calculation area update process (step S81) may be executed in any order after the prize ball control process (step S80) and before the bonus ratio calculation / display process (step S89). .

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a fraud detection process (step S84). In the fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the game is not in the big hit gaming state, when it is detected by the count switch that a game ball has entered the big winning opening 2005, 2006, etc., the main control program Creates a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Further, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability variation state based on the jackpot symbol random number value. Then, when the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the state is subsequently shifted to the probability variation state, while when the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, the state is shifted to a gaming state other than the probability variation state. Here, the “probability variation state” refers to a state (high probability state) in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively high compared to the normal gaming state (low probability state).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for normal symbol determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches with the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (“ Normal lottery ”). Then, it is determined whether to open / close the second start door member 2549 according to the lottery result of the normal lottery. When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the second start port door member 2549 is in an open (or enlarged) state so that a game ball can be received in the start winning port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. Transition to the gaming state.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated. If the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio calculation / display process (FIGS. 23 and 24). And the bonus rate is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls stored in the bonus rate calculation area 13128. The calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S89). In this way, by calling the accessory ratio calculation / display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the accessory ratio, it is possible to check the accessory ratio (the gambling nature of the gaming machine 1) based on the latest data.

  If the main body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2 regardless of whether the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is being operated, the main character ratio is displayed. May be. Further, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. It may be displayed. Since the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is provided on the back side of the game board, the main body frame 4 is normally open and the progress of the game is stopped if the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is displayed. doing. As described above, when the accessory ratio is calculated at the timing when the progress of the game is stopped, CPU resources are not consumed by division or subtraction for calculating the accessory ratio during the game, and the load on the CPU can be reduced.

  Details of the accessory ratio calculation / display processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. A specific example of the method for displaying the accessory ratio will be described later. Note that when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, all kinds of values (an accessory ratio, a continuous accessory ratio, a total, a total total) may be calculated. For each operation, only the displayed value may be calculated. Also, regardless of whether the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is calculated. If the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. It may be displayed.

  Even when the pachinko machine 1 detects fraud and stops the game, the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S81) and the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89) are executed. Regardless of whether or not fraud has been detected, by executing these processes, it is possible to check the ratio of the accessory even during fraud notification.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an output data setting process (step S90). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951, or a big hit game When it is in a state, it outputs a drive signal to an attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that opens and closes the opening / closing member 2107 of the special winning openings 2005 and 2006, In addition to outputting a drive signal to a start-port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the start-port (second start-port door member 2549), a probability variation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, and a normal symbol display information output Various games related to signals such as signals, short and medium information output information, start opening prize information output signal, etc. Broadcast and outputs a (game information) signal to the payout control board 951.

  In the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the gaming machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a gaming state, a signal indicating a normal symbol, and a special symbol stop symbol (information signal output means).

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information such as commands and data is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In the transmission information, various commands created by the timer interrupt processing which is this routine are stored. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum thereof, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL clears the watchdog timer clear register WCL. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above process is completed, the timer interrupt process is terminated and the process before the interrupt is restored.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the timer interrupt process. An object ratio calculation process may be executed. In this case, the main control board 1310 may transmit a command for displaying an accessory ratio or a continuous accessory ratio to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or the payout control unit 952 to the peripheral control unit 1511. You may transmit the command for displaying an accessory ratio or a continuous-object ratio.

[5-3. Property ratio calculation / display processing]
23 and 24 are flowcharts showing an example of the accessory ratio calculation / display process. The accessory ratio calculation / display process is executed by the main control MPU 1311. Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may execute the accessory ratio calculation / display process. When the peripheral control unit 1511 calculates the accessory ratio, the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, when the calculated accessory ratio is within a predetermined range (or outside the range), the effect in the game may be changed. Specifically, when the ratio of the bonuses exceeds a predetermined threshold value (threshold value smaller than the reference value), the notice effect may be changed and the notice effect that is more interesting than the normal notice effect may be performed.

  First, a check code is calculated from the main area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 (step S140), and the calculated check code is stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether they match (step S142). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the main area is normal. The object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S156). More specifically, the feature ratio is calculated by the number of winning characters divided by the total number of acquired balls, and the consecutive feature ratio is calculated by calculating the number of consecutive winning characters divided by the total number of acquired balls. The fractional part (value after the decimal point) of the calculated character ratio and continuous character ratio should be rounded down or rounded off. Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

  In step S156, the updated value may be copied to the backup area every time the combination ratio and / or continuous combination ratio in the combination ratio calculation area 13128 is updated.

  When the number of bits to be stored is large and the number of bits that can be calculated by the main control MPU 1311 is insufficient, in the calculation of the accessory ratio, the lower bits of the acquired sphere number are omitted and division is performed. May be calculated. For example, if the storage area for the number of acquired balls is 32 bits, a numerical value from 0 to 4,294,967,295 can be stored. However, if the main control MPU is an 8-bit processor and can perform 8- or 16-bit operations, it takes the lower 16 bits from the most significant bit with a value of 1 out of the number of acquired balls stored in 32 bits. It is good to divide by storing in a register (16 bits). If the number of acquired balls is equal to or less than the maximum number of bits that can be used for calculation (32767, which is the maximum value of 16 bits), the lower 16 bits may be extracted and used for the calculation.

  Further, dividing the total number of acquired balls by 100 (rounding down the fractional part) and using it as a dividend (number to be divided) can calculate a bonus ratio, thereby avoiding a decimal calculation.

  Further, the upper limit of the accessory ratio may be set to 99, and 99 may be set when the calculation result of the accessory ratio is 100 or more.

  On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the main area is abnormal, so the accessory ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 1. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 1 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S144), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. (Step S146). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the backup area 1 is normal and the data in the backup area 1 is copied to the main area (step S148). ), An accessory ratio calculation process is executed, and an accessory ratio and a continuous accessory ratio are calculated from the data in the main area (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

  On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the backup area 1 is abnormal, so the accessory ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 2. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 2 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S150), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. (Step S152). If the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the data in the backup area 1 is normal and the data in the backup area 2 is copied to the main area (step S154). ), An accessory ratio calculation process is executed, data in the main area is read, and an accessory ratio and a continuous accessory ratio are calculated (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

  If there is another backup area, similarly, it is determined whether the data in the backup area is normal, and the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio are calculated from the normal backup area data.

  If the data in the main area and all the backup areas are abnormal, the work ratio calculation work area (object ratio calculation area 13128) is initialized and the abnormality is notified (step S158).

  Subsequently, a check code is calculated from the main area (step S160), and the calculated check code is stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S162). The check code is calculated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process because the power failure flag and the checksum are not calculated in the initialization process because the power failure flag and the checksum are not calculated when resetting in the middle of the main board power-off process. The backed up data is initialized, but if the check code is periodically calculated and stored in the ratio calculation / display process, the ratio calculation work area will be available even if the pachinko machine is turned on again. This is because the data in the (actual object ratio calculation area 13128) can remain without being erased.

  Subsequently, the backup area distribution counter value is updated by adding 1 (step S164), and it is determined whether the backup area distribution counter value is an odd number (step S166). If the backup area distribution counter value is an odd number, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 1 (step S168). On the other hand, if the backup area distribution counter value is an even number, the data in the main area is copied to the backup area 2 (step S170). By distributing the copy destination of the data in the main area by the backup area distribution counter value and writing the data only in a part of the backup areas, it is possible to prevent abnormal values from being written in a plurality of backup areas.

  When three or more backup areas are provided, the backup area into which data is written may be distributed by the remainder obtained by dividing the backup area distribution counter value by the number of backup areas.

  Subsequently, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S172). Specifically, using the calculated type of the accessory ratio and the calculated value, the conversion table (not shown) is referred to obtain data to be displayed in each digit of the accessory ratio display 1317, The acquired data is sent to the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. For example, if the type of the accessory ratio is an accessory ratio (cumulative), A7 is displayed in the first two digits, and if the calculated accessory ratio is 66%, 66 is displayed in the lower two digits.

  In the accessory ratio calculation process (step S156) of the accessory ratio calculation / display process, the data on the number of acquired balls is read from the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (that is, the accessory ratio calculation work area shown in FIG. 26). The data cannot be written in the storage area related to the acquired number of balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. That is, as will be described later, when the processes of steps S156 and S172 are configured by a common program module, the common program module does not have the authority to write data in the storage area related to the acquired number of balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. In addition, data can be written in the storage area of the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio.

  As described above, the data for calculating the accessory ratio in the accessory ratio calculation / display process is duplicated in the backup area, so if the normal power failure process is not executed due to an abnormal reset, etc. Data for calculating the object ratio can be protected.

  In addition, since the process of step S156, S172 is common regardless of the kind of game machine, it is good to comprise by one or several common program modules. In this case, the process for determining whether the check code for the main area and the check code for the backup area are correct may be configured on the non-common side separately from the common program module. This is because the data check and backup methods differ for each model. However, if the data check and backup methods are shared among the models, they may be arranged in a common program module.

[6. Storage area configuration]
Next, the arrangement of programs and data stored in the ROM 1313 will be described. FIG. 25A is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in the ROM 1313 built in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

  The ROM 1313 stores game control code 13131, game control data 13132, debug (inspection function) code 13133, debug (inspection function) data 13134, accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135, and accessory ratio calculation / display. An area for storing the use data 13136 is included. In the ROM 1313 of this embodiment, a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the gaming machine 1 such as a game control code 13131 and game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133 are stored. And a debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of the gaming machine 1, such as debug (inspection function) data 13134 And an accessory ratio calculation area (third storage area) for storing a program used for calculating an accessory ratio, such as an accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 and an accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136. Is assigned.

  The debug (inspection function) area stores target programs and data not directly related to the game. For example, various functions used only during the debugging of the gaming machine 1 other than the gaming control of the gaming machine 1 A code for outputting the inspection signal is stored. These debug (inspection function) codes are programs for outputting a debug (inspection function) signal. In addition, the object ratio calculation area stores a program for calculating an object ratio that is not directly related to the progress of the game.

  The game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. The game control code 13131 can be read from and written to the RAM 1312 as appropriate, but the game control area 13126 used by the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured to be executable, and is configured so that writing to the area cannot be performed. The processing based on the debug (inspection function) code can be unilaterally called and executed during the execution of the game control code 13131. However, the game control code 13131 can be executed from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be increased, so that even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the change of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. .

  Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt process) and is executed by the main control MPU 1311. The accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio calculation / display code is stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. In this way, the character ratio calculation / display code 13135 is designed separately from the game control code 13131 and stored in a separate area, thereby checking the character ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the game control code 13131. The inspection of the gaming machine 1 can be reduced. Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 can be commonly used by a plurality of models without depending on the model.

  FIG. 25B is a diagram showing details of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may include a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to the main area in which the calculation result of the accessory ratio is stored. . There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting a data error is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or set every time the main area data is updated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process. 21 may be set in step S50 to step S54). In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined that the initialization process is normal or the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control side power-off process (step S50 in FIG. 19). May be set. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. If a predetermined value is set for the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

  When it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it is determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data of the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area (step in FIG. 20). S24). In the main control side power-off process, the value of the main area may be copied to each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 21). Further, in the accessory ratio calculation / display processing, the updated data may be copied to the backup area every time the value of the main area is updated (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 24).

  Unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digits of the address.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The data on the number of balls acquired in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is written in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22) timed by the main control MPU 1311, and the accessory ratio calculation process of the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step of FIG. 23) It is read in S156). In this way, the bonus ratio calculation / display process reads the acquired ball number data from the bonus ratio calculation area 13128, and the timer interrupt process (game control program) acquires the bonus ball data in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128. Can be completely separated from the game control program and the program for executing the accessory ratio calculation / display process, and the game for the ratio calculation / display process of the accessory ratio can be made common to gaming machines of different specifications. .

  It should be noted that the accessory ratio calculation process (step S156 in FIG. 23) of the accessory ratio calculation / display process uses the calculated accessory ratio and the consecutive accessory ratio as the accessory ratio and the consecutive accessory in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. Write to the ratio storage area. The data of the calculated feature ratio and continuous feature ratio are read out in the accessory ratio display process (step S170 in FIG. 24) of the accessory ratio calculation / display process when displaying the accessory ratio. The game control program does not access the storage area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 and the consecutive accessory ratio storage area.

  FIG. 26A shows the structure of the work area of the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 26 (A), the number of winning balls acquired, the number of consecutive winning balls, the total number of acquired balls, the winning ratio and the consecutive winning ratio are stored. The number of winning winning balls is the number of winning balls by winning a winning action (for example, the open large winning opening 2005, 2006, the second starting opening 2004 with the second starting opening door member 2549 open). is there. The number of consecutive winning characters is the number of winning balls for winning a winning combination when the winning combination is in continuous operation (for example, the winning opening is open in the big hit series). The total number of winning balls is the total number of winning balls paid out to the player. The bonus rate can be calculated by the number of winning balls divided by the total number of acquired balls. The consecutive character ratio can be calculated by the number of consecutive character acquisition balls divided by the total number of acquired balls. The number of winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, and the total number of winning balls are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process, and the winning ratio and the consecutive winning ratio are calculated in step S91 of the timer interrupt process. Stored.

  Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 26 (A), the number of winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, and the total number of acquired balls correspond to the total cumulative number of FIG. It is a 4-byte storage area and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. In addition, the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio are storage areas of 1 byte, and numerical values up to 255 in decimal can be stored.

  FIG. 26B shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 26 (B), the number of winning balls acquired, the number of other acquired balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, the total number of acquired balls, the winning ratio, and the consecutive winning ratio are stored. Each data storage area is constituted by a ring buffer having n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (for example, n = 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls). When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointers of all data move, and the storage area in which the data is updated changes. Then, after data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when data other than the total number of acquired balls (such as the number of winning characters, the number of fired balls, the number of winning balls, the number of special symbol variation display games, the number of special symbol variation display game jackpots, etc.) reaches a predetermined number, The writing pointer may be moved.

  Note that the write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all data strings move for each predetermined number of prize balls. Also, the read pointer moves as the write pointer moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is to calculate the ratio of the bonuses using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

  The total of each data is the total value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the total value of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio is a value calculated from the total value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer goes around and is cleared to one storage area of the ring buffer in order to write new data, the accumulated value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past. Even if the ring buffer goes around and is cleared to one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the total accumulated value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

  Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 26 (B), the number of winning characters acquired, the number of consecutive winning characters, the ratio of the winning features, and the consecutive winning ratio are the same as those in FIG. 26 (A). The number of other winning balls is the number of winning balls by winning a prize other than a bonus item (a winning opening that does not open or close, for example, a general winning opening 2001). The total number of acquired balls is the total number of winning balls paid out to the player. When this value reaches a predetermined number, the writing pointer moves. As for the number of winning balls, the number of other acquired balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, and the total number of winning balls, the data in the storage area where the write pointer is stored is updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process, and The physical ratio is calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 26C shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 26 (C), more detailed data than that shown in FIG. 26 (B) can be acquired, and the number of acquired ordinary electric combination, special electric combination, and start opening acquisition. In addition, the number of winning mouth winning balls, the number of consecutive feature winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the bonus rate and the consecutive bonus rate are stored. The storage area of each data is composed of a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total number of acquired balls is When the predetermined number (6000) is reached, the write pointer moves to change the storage area in which data is updated. Then, after data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when the number of data other than the total number of acquired balls (the number of acquired special electric bonuses, the number of fired balls, the number of winning balls, the number of special symbol variation display games, the number of special symbol variation display games, etc.) reaches a predetermined number In addition, the write pointer may be moved.

  The total of each data is the total value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the total value of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio is a value calculated from the total value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer goes around and is cleared to one storage area of the ring buffer in order to write new data, the accumulated value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past. The cumulative value of the ratio of consecutive items and the ratio of consecutive features is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Even if it is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer for writing new data, the total accumulated value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

  Of the work area structures shown in FIGS. 26B and 26C, the number of winning balls in the ring buffer, the number of other winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, the total number of acquired balls, the ordinary electric winning ball The number, the number of special electric accessory acquired balls, the number of starting port acquired balls, and the number of other winning port acquired balls are 2-byte storage areas, and numerical values up to 65535 can be stored in decimal numbers. Number of winning balls, number of other winning balls, number of consecutive winning points, total number of acquired balls, number of normal electric winning points, number of special electric winning points, starting point and other winning points The total number is a storage area of 3 bytes each, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 in decimal. Since the total is the total of data for 6000 prize balls × n (60000 prize balls when n = 10), a large storage area is prepared. Number of winning balls, number of consecutive winning balls, total number of winning balls, total number of winning balls, ratio of winning points, ratio of consecutive winning points, number of normal electric winning points, number of winning special electric winning points, starting point The total number of acquired balls and the total number of other winning holes acquired is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 can be stored in decimal. Since the total total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. In addition, the cumulative total and the total cumulative of the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio are each a 1-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

  Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 26C, the total number of balls acquired, the ratio of winning combinations, and the ratio of consecutive winning combinations are the same as those explained in FIG. The number of other winning balls is the number of winning balls by winning a prize other than a bonus item (a winning opening that does not open or close). The number of balls obtained for the ordinary electric accessory is a prize ball obtained by winning a prize for the ordinary electric accessory being operated (the second start opening 2004 with the second start opening door member 2549 open) according to the result of the lottery based on the normal symbol. Is a number. The number of special electric accessory winning balls is the number of winning balls by winning a prize for a special electric accessory that is in operation (for example, the big winning opening 2005, 2006 being opened) according to the result of lottery with a special symbol. The number of starting opening points acquired is the number of winning balls acquired by winning the starting winning opening (first starting opening 2002). The number of winning balls earned for winning a prize is the number of winning balls that are obtained by winning a prize winning opening (general winning opening 2001) that is not an accessory (does not operate) and does not trigger a special symbol lottery. In step S81 of the timer interrupt process, the number of balls acquired by the electric motor, the number of balls acquired by the special electric game, the number of balls acquired by the starter, the number of balls acquired by other winning mouths, the number of balls acquired by the continuous winning combination, and the total number of balls acquired are counted. The data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated, and the bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate are calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

  In the data structure shown in FIG. 26A, when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is deleted in step S116 of the initialization process. Data will not be erased when For this reason, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the total accumulation in FIGS. 24B and 24C may be deleted every predetermined period.

  Also, the data of the feature ratio calculation area 13128 and the calculated feature ratio are abnormal values (for example, the feature ratio is more than 100%, and the calculation result of the feature ratio is greatly changed from the previous calculated value. In this case, the abnormal value may be deleted. In addition to the abnormal value, all data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Further, when the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that it is abnormal. In addition, the data in the backup area may be inspected using the check code, and after the normal backup area data is copied to the main area, the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[7. Composition of an accessory ratio display]
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the configuration of the accessory ratio display 1313.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 includes a driver circuit 13171 and a plurality of 7-segment LEDs 13172. For example, the 7 segment LED 13172 is composed of 4 digits.

  The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are preferably housed in one package, but both may be housed in another package.

  The driver circuit 13171 and the main control MPU 1311 are connected by three signal lines (DATA, LOAD, and CLOCK).

  The DATA line transfers data to be displayed on the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and a signal for setting the operation state of the accessory ratio indicator 1317, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The LOAD line transfers a signal indicating the data capture timing and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The CLOCK line transfers a clock signal that defines the operation cycle of the driver circuit 13171 and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311.

  The driver circuit 13171 and the 7 segment LED 13172 are connected by four digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 and eight segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. The segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp transmit signals for lighting the LED elements (7 segments and decimal point) of the 7-segment LED 13172. The digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 transmit a control signal indicating which digit signal of the 7-segment LED 13172 is transmitted through the segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. The direction of the signal (current) shown is different depending on whether the 7-segment LED 13172 is an anode common type or a cathode common type, but an example of the anode common type is shown.

  A resistor 13174 that determines a current value to be passed through each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 is connected to the R-EXT terminal of the driver circuit 13171. By changing the resistance value of the resistor 13173, the light emission luminance of each LED element of the segment LED 13172 can be changed.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the configuration of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317.

  The driver circuit 13171 includes a 16-bit shift register 3171, a 16-bit data latch 3172, 8-bit data latches 3173A to D, an 8 × 4 data selector 3174, a decoder 3175, a 2 × 8 data selector 3176, a constant current driver 3178, a driver 3179, A latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, a digit-limit control unit 3181, a duty ratio control unit 3182, a data selector control unit 3183, a standby mode control unit 3184, and an oscillator 3185 are included.

  The 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal, holds 16-bit data, and sends it to the 16-bit data latch 3172 as parallel data. The four bits D15 (MSB) to D12 are data for selecting an operation mode (see FIG. 34) of the driver circuit 13171, and the four bits D11 to D8 are data for selecting a register corresponding to the operation mode. (See FIG. 32), D7 to D0 (LSB) are data of the detailed setting.

  The 16-bit data latch 3172 latches data at the timing of the LOAD signal, and D15 to D8 are controlled by each control unit (latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, Digit / Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control). Unit 3183 and standby mode control unit 3184), and D7 to D0 are sent to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29, the 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal at the rising timing of the CLOCK signal and shifts the data. The 16-bit data latch 3172 acquires 16-bit data as parallel data from the 16-bit shift register 3171 at the rising timing of the LOAD signal, and latches the data. Then, D15 to D8 are sent to each control unit (latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control unit 3183, standby mode control unit 3184). The 16-bit data latch 3172 sends D7 to D0 among the latched data to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D at the falling timing of the LOAD signal.

  The LOAD signal is also input to the latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180. The latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180 acquires D15 to D8 and selects the 8-bit data latch 3173 for storing the display data (8 bits of D7 to D0). Specifically, as shown in the load register selection table (see FIG. 32), if D15 to D8 are 00100010B, the latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180 has 8 bits of data register 0, that is, Digit-A. A signal for selecting the 8-bit data latch 3173 is sent so that the data latch 3173A stores data.

  The 8-bit data latch 3173 is provided by the number of 7-segment LEDs 13172 (the number of display digits). According to the selection signal from the latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, the data to be displayed on each 7-segment LED is fetched. Hold. The 8-bit data latch 3173 sends the held data to the 8 × 4 data selector 3174.

  The 8 × 4 data selector 3174 selects the data sent from each of the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D at a predetermined display timing of each digit, and sends the data to the decoder 3175 and the 2 × 8 data selector 3176.

  The decoder 3175 converts the input data into characters to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172 using the character generator decode table (see FIG. 33), and generates data for lighting each segment. The generated data is input to the 2 × 8 data selector 3176.

  The 2 × 8 data selector 3176 refers to the decode setting, selects data from the decoder 3175 when the mode using the decoder is set, and 8 × when the mode is set not to use the decoder. The data from the 4 data selector 3174 is selected. The selected data is input to the constant current driver 3178.

  The constant current driver 3178 uses the data from the 2 × 8 data selector 3176 to output current signals for lighting each segment from the data output terminals OUTa to OUTDp. As described above, the current output from the constant current driver 3178 is controlled by the resistance value of the resistor connected to the R-EXT terminal.

  The driver 3179 receives the sink current of the current output from the constant current driver 3178 in order to light each segment of the 7-segment LED 13172. The driver 3179 determines which 7-segment LED (digit) is displayed by controlling the current suction timing of the terminals DIG-0 to DIG-3.

  The Digit-Limit control unit 3181 controls the number of display digits of the 7-segment LED 13172 controlled by the driver circuit 13171. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the number of digits to be lit from 1 to 4 digits by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to xxx × 0011B, all four digits are set in the digit register (DIGITREGISTER) of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181. Is written. X indicates that either H or L data may be used, and whether the input data is H or L does not affect the truth table.

  The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the duty ratio by setting from the outside, and controls the brightness at which the 7-segment LED 13172 is lit. The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio by controlling the pulse width of at least one of the timing signals sent to the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179. Specifically, by setting D15 to D8 to 0010000B and inputting arbitrary data to D3 to D0, the duty register (DUTY REGISTER) of the duty ratio control unit 3182 has 16-stage duty of 0/16 to 15/16. The ratio setting is written.

  The data selector control unit 3183 controls setting of the decoder. That is, the driver circuit 13171 controls whether to use the decoder 3175 according to the setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to 0001xxxxxxx, settings for using the decoder are written to the decode register, and D7 to D0 are set to 0000xxx. By inputting the data as XXB, the setting of NO DECODER not using the decoder is written. The data selector control unit 3183 controls the 2 × 8 data selector 3176 to select data from the decoder 3175 when it is set to use the decoder, and 2 when it is set not to use the decoder. Control is performed so that the × 8 data selector 3176 selects data from the 8 × 4 data selector 3174.

  The standby mode control unit 3184 controls the standby mode setting and the data clear setting. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can shift to the standby mode by setting from the outside. Specifically, the standby mode can be set by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0000B. In the standby mode, the setting at that time is maintained as it is, the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172 is cut off, and the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171 is suppressed.

  In addition, the driver circuit 13171 can clear all data held inside by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0001B, all data held in the registers and latches are cleared and initialized.

  The oscillator 3185 generates a clock used in the driver circuit 13171.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a mounting example of the main control board 1310. In the drawing, the configuration on the main control board box 1320 is indicated by a solid line, and the configuration on the main control board 1310 is indicated by a dotted line.

  FIG. 30A shows the main control board box 1320 of the first mounting example. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that accommodates the main control board 1310 so that it can be sealed without being broken and cannot be opened once closed. (Seal sticking, engraving, printing, etc.) and an opening seal are affixed. The opening seal is a seal that records a history of opening the seal of the main control board 1310.

  Mounting example 1 shown in FIG. 30B shows a state in which main control board 1310 is housed in main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. In the mounting example 1, the main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 may be mounted so that the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are the same direction.

  The main control board 1310 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320 and constitutes the main control unit 1300. The main control MPU 1311 is disposed at a position where it can be confirmed from the outside that inappropriate modification has not been made. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is arranged so that it is possible to easily confirm from the outside that inappropriate modification has not been made by not arranging parts around it.

  The accessory ratio indicator 1317 is disposed on the main control board 1310 at a position where it can be visually recognized from the outside. The direction of the numbers displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 may be in the same direction as the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the model number display 1320 on the main control board box. Further, it is preferable to mount so that the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio display 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310, and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are the same direction. When the main control board 1310 is mounted on the gaming machine in a landscape orientation, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 or the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are the same. It is preferable to mount an accessory ratio display 1317 and a main control MPU 1311 so as to be. In addition, when the main control board 1310 is mounted on the gaming machine in a portrait orientation, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio display 1317 or the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are 90 degrees. An accessory ratio display 1317 and a main control MPU 1311 may be mounted so as to be oriented.

  Further, the connectors CN1 and CN2 for drawing out signal lines from the main control board 1310 are aligned with the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in the longitudinal direction, and are end portions along the long side of the main control board 1310 (the upper length in the figure). The upper end portion along the side may be mounted on the lower end portion along the lower long side or the end portion along the left and right sides). That is, it is desirable that the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged at positions where the wiring (harness) connected to the connectors CN1 and CN2 overlaps with the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and does not hinder the visual recognition of the accessory ratio indicator 1317. .

  Further, the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the unsealed seal attached to the main control board box 1320 are attached to positions that do not overlap with either the main control MPU or the accessory ratio indicator 1317.

  By mounting the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in this way, the model number display of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 is displayed in the correct orientation, improving the visibility of these, and improving the manufacturing process and the playground. Even in the inspection after installation, it is possible to check the ratio of the accessory and the presence / absence of modification of the main control MPU 1311 without taking an excessive posture.

  In another mounting example shown in FIG. 30C, the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the numerical display of the accessory ratio display 1317 are mounted in the same direction, but circuits other than the main control MPU 1311 are mounted. The direction of the model number display of the module (for example, IC) is different from the direction of the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the number display of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged at a position overlapping the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening seal attached to the main control board box 1320. This is because the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 are less important when inspecting unauthorized modification, and therefore, it is not meaningful to make the directions arranged on the main control board 1310 the same.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, the signal line 13173 between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be unstable due to the influence of noise. For this reason, it is desirable to arrange the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 as close as possible.

  For example, as illustrated, the distance between the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 (the length L2 of the wiring 13173) is the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 (the length of the wiring 13101). L1) It arrange | positions so that it may become shorter. That is, L1 becomes larger than L2.

  Further, as described above, no parts are arranged around the main control MPU 1311 in order to easily confirm from the outside that inappropriate modification has not been made, as indicated by a dotted line. For this reason, the wiring length L1 becomes a certain length, but L2 is made as short as possible.

  Note that the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed in one package or in another package, and in any case, L1 is mounted to be larger than L2.

  FIG. 31 (B) is a diagram showing a positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317 in another implementation example, and FIG. 31 (C) is a diagram in the implementation example shown in FIG. 31 (B). It is sectional drawing of a printed circuit board.

  As shown in FIG. 31B, ground patterns 13102 are provided on both sides of the signal line 13101 between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, in the printed circuit board, a prohibited area 13106 in which no signal pattern is provided is provided on the back surface and inner layer of the signal line 13101. A ground pattern 13107 or a power supply pattern as a guard pattern may be provided on at least one of the back surface and the inner layer of the printed circuit board in the prohibited area 13106.

  The arrangement of other signal lines in this implementation example will be described. For example, the signal line 13103 that supplies a clock signal from the oscillator to the main control MPU 1311 avoids the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13103 and the signal line 13101 are Arranged so as not to intersect. Further, the signal line 13104 connected to the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged so as to pass through the back surface or the inner layer through the through hole 13105. Also in this case, the signal line 13104 is arranged avoiding the prohibited region 13106 (that is, the signal line 13104 and the signal line 13101 do not intersect).

  The main control board 1310 is generally formed of a two-layer board having a pattern on the front surface and the back surface and no inner layer from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification. The present invention can also be applied to a multilayer substrate (such as four layers or six layers) having an inner layer.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a load register selection table of the driver circuit 13171.

  The load register selection table is a table for determining a register for storing data input to the driver circuit 13171.

  The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has seven registers. The duty register is used by the duty ratio control unit 3182 to set a duty ratio for lighting the 7-segment LED 13172. For example, when D15 to D8 are 0010000B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the duty ratio, and is written in the duty register of the duty ratio control unit 3182.

  The decode register is used by the data selector control unit 3183 or the Digit-Limit control unit 3181, and the use of the decoder 3175, that is, the presence / absence of decoding and the number of display digits are set. The decode register and the digit number register may be configured as one register. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100001B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the presence / absence of decoding or data for setting the number of display digits, and is decoded by the data selector control unit 3183. It is written into the register or the digit register of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181.

  The data register is used by the 8-bit data latches 3173A to 3173D, and data to be displayed in each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100010B to 00100101B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for lighting the 7-segment LED, and is written in the data registers in the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D.

  The duty ratio, the presence / absence of decoding, and the number of display digits set in the register described above do not need to be set every time the accessory ratio is displayed, and may be set once. Therefore, the initial setting is performed in step S28 of FIG. Set as Note that when the initial setting is set only once, the setting may be changed after the initial setting due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, every time the opening of the body frame 4 is detected, the switch button It may be reset every time () is pressed. Thereby, even if the setting is switched due to noise, correct display can always be performed.

  FIG. 33 shows a character generator decoding table. The character generator decode table is used by the decoder 3175 to convert input data into character data to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172. By using the character generator decoding table, characters such as numbers and some alphabets can be displayed without considering the font. Further, when displaying numbers, D5 to D0 match the displayed numbers, so that the calculation result can be input to the driver circuit 13171 without conversion and displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172.

  The lighting of the decimal point of each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is controlled by D6.

  FIG. 34 is a state transition diagram of the driver circuit 13171, and FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a display example of the accessory ratio display 1317.

  The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has five states: an initial state, a data input completed state, an LED lighting state (0000), an LED lighting state (lighting according to input data), and an LED lighting state (all lighting). Has been prepared.

  In order to control these five states, there are blank, normal operation, register write, full lighting, and standby mode setting commands. The blank command cuts off the output of the constant current driver 3178 and the output of the driver 3179. The normal operation command displays the 7-segment LED 13172 after completion of each setting. When a normal operation command is input without setting display data, the 7-segment LED 13172 displays the number 0 in all digits. The register write command sets the number of used digits, sets the duty ratio, sets whether the decoder is used or not, and inputs display data. A register to which data is written is selected in D11 to D8, and contents to be set in the register are input in D7 to D0 (see FIG. 32). The all lighting command turns on the output of the constant current driver 3178 on the data side and lights all the segments of the 7 segment LED 13172. The standby instruction is divided into two according to parameters, and includes a standby instruction for transitioning to a standby state and a clear instruction for transitioning to an initial state. The standby command maintains the setting at that time, stops the operation of the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179, cuts off the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172, and suppresses the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171. The clear command clears and initializes all data held in the registers and latches, and turns off the display.

  Since the blank command is a kind of display command, in this specification, “display” includes any of the 7-segment LED all on, the partial segment on and all off.

  A display example in each state described above will be described with reference to FIG.

  At the time of power-on of the gaming machine, the initial setting of the driver circuit 13171 is not completed or the display data is not set. Therefore, the gaming machine is in the initial state (ALL BLANK), and as shown in FIG. All the segments of are turned off. Further, when the main body frame 4 is closed and a game is possible, the accessory ratio display 1317 cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, the standby mode is set, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off, and the power consumption of the gaming machine is reduced.

  When display data is input after the control data is set in the various control registers in the driver circuit 13171 and the initial setting is completed, a predetermined display is displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172. In this predetermined display, as shown in FIG. 35B, “-” may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit. It is preferable that the normal operation of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be confirmed by this predetermined display.

  Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is preferable to display a predetermined display in all the digits so that it can be confirmed that the accessory ratio display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 35B, “-” may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

  When the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated and display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the LED is turned on (lighting according to the input data). Specifically, it becomes the accessory ratio display state, the code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits of the 7-segment LED 13172, and the numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the two right digits. In the example shown in FIG. 35C, “y175” is displayed, which indicates that the accessory ratio 1 is 75%. In addition, when the displayed ratio of an accessory is an abnormal value outside the specified range, it is preferable to display that fact. For example, all digits (or numbers) are displayed blinking, or the decimal point is lit or blinked.

  Further, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated and display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the display content of the 7-segment LED 13172 is changed. That is, the ratio of another type of accessory is displayed. In this case as well, a code indicating the display contents is displayed in the left two digits, and a value of an accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 35D, “y263” is displayed, which indicates that the accessory ratio 2 is 63%. In this case as well, a display that can identify that the displayed ratio of an accessory is an abnormal value out of the specified range is preferable as described above. A more specific display example of the accessory ratio will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is performed (FIG. 35E). After a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. Turn off the light and reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. The state of non-display of the accessory ratio is the same as that after completion of the initial setting, but may be a different aspect as long as it is distinguishable from the display of the ratio of the accessory.

  FIG. 35E is a display example when there is an abnormality in the accessory ratio display 1317 or the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio cannot be displayed. The decimal point may be lit or flashing, or may be displayed differently for each digit. Further, the abnormality display may be in a different form from that shown in the figure, and may be any form that can be distinguished from the normal accessory ratio display to indicate that the accessory ratio display is not possible.

  In any state, when an all lighting command is input, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are lit. In any state, when a blank command or standby command is input, all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are extinguished while retaining the data. In any state, when a data clear command is input, all data held in the registers and latches are cleared, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are lit, and the initial state is restored.

[8. Display of ratio
Next, a method for calculating and displaying an accessory ratio will be described.

  As described above, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 provided on the main control board 1310. As described above, the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is constituted by, for example, a four-digit 7-segment LED or a liquid crystal display device, and displays the numerical value of the accessory ratio in the last two digits and the type of the numerical value in the upper two digits. Is displayed.

  Moreover, you may comprise the accessory ratio display 1317 by 2 digits 7 segment LED. In this case, it is good to display the numerical value of an accessory ratio and the kind of the said numerical value alternately.

  The display mode of the numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in a different display mode depending on the comparison result between the accessory ratio and a predetermined reference value. For example, when the ratio of an accessory exceeds a predetermined reference value, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (green when normal, red when exceeding the reference). By changing the display mode according to the comparison result with the reference value, it is possible to easily recognize that the accessory ratio is abnormal.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 may be composed of one or a plurality of LED lamps. When the accessory ratio display 1317 is configured by one LED lamp, the comparison result between the accessory ratio and a predetermined reference value is displayed in a different manner. For example, when the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is displayed in green, and when the accessory ratio is greater than the reference value, it is displayed in red. Further, when the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is turned on, and when the accessory ratio is larger than the reference threshold value, it is blinked.

  When the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is composed of a plurality of (for example, ten) LED lamps, the accessory ratio is displayed with one LED lamp as 10%. For example, if the accessory ratio is 70% or more and less than 80%, seven LEDs are turned on. In this case, different display modes (display colors) may be displayed depending on the display contents (such as an accessory ratio or a continuous accessory ratio, the latest data display or the medium-term data display, etc.).

  In addition, when the total number of balls acquired is less than 6000, the prize ball data collection period is short, and the value of the ratio of the objects may not be converged, so the display is performed in different display modes (display color, blinking, etc.) May be. It is desirable that the display mode when the total number of acquired balls is smaller than the threshold and the display mode when the above-described reference value is exceeded are different from each other.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 may switch and display the latest data display, medium-term data display, and long-term data display. The most recent data display is an accessory ratio calculated using the previous counter value currently being written in the ring counter shown in FIGS. The medium-term data display is an accessory ratio calculated using the cumulative total in the ring counter shown in FIGS. The long-term data display is an accessory ratio calculated using the total total in the ring counter shown in FIGS.

  The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may also be used as the function display unit 1400. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the gaming status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio. Although the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, the progress of the game may be continued. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, it is possible to quickly switch from the accessory ratio display to the display of the game state. For example, when the main body frame 4 is opened during the special symbol fluctuation display game, the ratio of the actors is displayed. However, if the main body frame 4 is closed before the fluctuation time has elapsed, the fluctuation display for the remaining time may be performed. it can. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol stops at the timing when the special symbol variation display on the function display unit 1400 stops. For this reason, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio, the player can be configured not to feel uncomfortable.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 may display other than the accessory ratio. For example, you may display the number of winnings and the number of awarded balls for each type of winning opening. The unit time may be switched and displayed by operating the accessory ratio display switch 1318 such as 1 minute, 10 minutes, 1 hour, and 10 hours.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 may display a base. The base is the normal payout rate excluding the special award (medium hit), and can be calculated by the number of safe balls divided by the number of out balls. The number of shot balls (the number of out balls) is detected by a shot ball sensor 1020. As described above, the launch ball sensor 1020 is provided in the vicinity of the outlets (backflow prevention member 1007) of the rails 1001 and 1002 that guide the game ball from the ball launcher to the game area 5a (see FIGS. 10 and 16). Further, the number of out balls may be detected by the discharge ball sensor 3060. As described above, the discharge ball sensor 3060 is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game ball flowing out from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). In addition, an out-port passing ball sensor 1021 (see FIG. 52) that detects a game ball passing through the out port 1111 provided in the lower portion of the game area 5a is provided, and the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021; The number of out balls may be detected by the sum of the number of game balls detected by the start port sensors 2104 and 2551 and the number of game balls detected by the various winning port sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, and 2557. Furthermore, a launch supply ball sensor (not shown) for detecting a game ball supplied to the ball launcher 680, and a game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 but not reaching the game area 5a (so-called foul ball) A foul ball sensor (not shown) that detects the number of game balls supplied to the ball launcher 680 detected by the launch supply ball sensor is subtracted from the number of game balls and the number of out balls (number of shot balls) is obtained. It may be detected.

  The number of out balls may be counted by any of the methods described above. That is, it is sufficient that either the discharge ball sensor 3060 or the fire ball sensor 1020 is provided among the illustrated sensors.

  The number of safe balls is equal to the number of prize balls paid out. Also, the base may be defined as a payout rate for each gaming state (during normal gaming, during electric support, during probability fluctuation, during time reduction), and may be calculated by the number of safe balls divided by the number of outballs for each gaming state . By displaying the base on the accessory ratio display 1317, it is possible to check the deviation from the design value of the starting performance during operation for each gaming machine on the spot. In addition, since it is possible to check the performance of the ball without using the hall control, it becomes easy to inspect each gaming machine at the on-site inspection of the game hall.

  The accessory ratio indicator 1317 is information on other winnings and winning balls in the base (the number of winnings in the general winning opening 2001, the number of winning balls by the winning, the number of winnings in the starting winning opening 2002, and the number of winning balls by the winning) , The number of winning prizes in the big winning openings 2005 and 2006, the number of winning balls by the winning, etc.) may be displayed.

  The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may always display the accessory ratio by operating the accessory ratio display switch 1318, even if it displays the accessory ratio. For example, when an accessory ratio display switch 1318, which is a pushbutton switch, is pressed, the display of the accessory ratio is started, and after displaying for a predetermined time, the display is turned off. When the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. May be. That is, if the body ratio display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame is open, the body ratio display 1317 does not display the body ratio.

  Further, the display content may be changed every time the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated. For example, as shown in FIG. 36, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated once, A7 indicating the accessory ratio (cumulative total) is displayed in the first two digits, and a predetermined number (for example, 60000) prize balls The ratio of the actors to is displayed in the last two digits. When the character ratio display switch 1318 is operated once more, the display of the first two digits is switched to A6 indicating the continuous character ratio (cumulative), and the continuous character ratio for a predetermined number (for example, 60000) prize balls. May be displayed in the last two digits (FIG. 36B). Further, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated once, y7 indicating the accessory ratio (6000 prize balls) is displayed in the upper two digits, and the accessory ratio based on the latest data is displayed in the lower two digits (the latest data). Display) (FIG. 36C). When the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated once more, the upper two digits display switches to y6 which means the accessory ratio (cumulative), and the accessory ratio for a predetermined number (for example, 60000) prize balls is decreased. Display may be performed in two digits (mid-term data display) (FIG. 36D).

  The accessory ratio display switch 1318 may not be provided as an independent switch, but may also be used as a RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. That is, the switch functions as a RAM clear switch when operated when the power is turned on, and functions as an accessory ratio display switch 1318 when operated during the operation of the gaming machine 1. By consolidating the functions of the RAM clear switch and the accessory ratio display switch 1318 into one switch, there is only one switch operated by a game attendant, and it is possible to reduce erroneous operations by inexperienced attendants.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accurately calculate the ratio of the actors in the operating gaming machine and to confirm the gambling characteristics of the operating gaming machine.

  Further, since the data on the number of prize balls is accumulated as the data for calculating / displaying the ratio of an accessory 13131 and the data for calculating / displaying the ratio of an accessory 13131 is deleted when the check code is abnormal, the display of the incorrect ratio of an accessory is displayed. Can be avoided.

  In addition, since the data for calculating the ratio of the object ratio 13136 is deleted under a condition different from the condition for erasing the data backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control unit 13MPU 1311, the data for the accurate winning ball number is retained, You can calculate the object ratio.

  In addition, since the character ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the character ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not mistakenly erased by the operation of the staff in the game hall. Since the object ratio calculation / display data is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the data is not erased by an erroneous operation of a staff member at the game hall. In addition, since the game place cannot intentionally delete the data for calculating / displaying the accessory ratio, the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio is increased, and concealment of a state where the accessory ratio is high can be prevented.

[9. View Base
[9-1. Basic configuration of gaming machine displaying base]
So far, the embodiment of the pachinko machine that calculates and displays the ratio of the accessory has been described. Next, an embodiment of the pachinko machine that calculates and displays the base value will be described.

  In the pachinko machine described below, as described above, when a game ball wins a start winning opening (first start opening 2002, second start opening 2004), a lottery with a random number is performed and a special symbol variation display game is executed. To do. The variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation display game is a relatively short variation pattern (a normal variation pattern of about 10 seconds, a shortened variation pattern of about 2 to 5 seconds that is easily selected when the number of holdings is large). There is also a relatively long time fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern such as a super reach exceeding 1 minute). When the base value is calculated by the pachinko machine, the notification of the base value is less urgent than the notification of the error, so that it can be notified at the timing when the special symbol variation display game is switched to the next variation display game. However, if the fluctuation display time is long, the waiting time of one special symbol fluctuation display game is not completed, and the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the number of out balls (number of shot balls) or the number of prize balls (paid balls) If the number) changes), it is preferable to calculate the base value and update the display. For this reason, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game (for example, even during the special symbol variation display game) (for example, the number of out balls (number of shot balls) or the number of prize balls (number of payout balls) ) Is changed), the base value is calculated and displayed. Next, a specific configuration of the pachinko machine that performs such an operation will be described.

  FIG. 37 is a block diagram showing a configuration around the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 that calculates and displays the base value.

  The pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 37 has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 17, but the configuration represented by reference numeral 1317 is a base indicator instead of an accessory ratio indicator. The base indicator 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment may use, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED as shown in FIGS. 4 and 27, and may have other numbers of digits (for example, 2 digits). A 7 segment LED may be used.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment acquires the number of winning balls and the number of out balls in the bonus ratio calculation area updating process (step S81) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22) executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89), the base value is calculated and displayed. In the following description, the “object ratio calculation area update process” in step S81 in FIG. 22 is read as “base calculation area update process”, and the “object ratio calculation / display process” in step S89 is “base”. It will be described as “calculation / display processing”. In addition, the “object ratio calculation area 13128” shown in FIG. 25 is read as “base calculation area 13128”, and the “object ratio calculation / display code 13135” is read as “base calculation / display code 13135”. The “object ratio calculation / display data 13136” will be read as “base calculation / display data 13136”.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the base calculation region update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process determines the current gaming state, adds the number of prize balls to be paid out as a gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. To do. In particular, the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 38 directly updates the total number of winning balls using the number of winning balls in order to calculate the base value every timer interruption period (step S814), and the number of out balls Is used to directly update the total number of out balls (step S822).

  First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). The game state is being awarded a special prize opening 2005, 2006 is open, and the player can acquire a lot of prize balls. However, including the opening and ending time of the jackpot game Good. When the big winning opening 2005, 2006 repeats opening and closing in one big hit, the time from closing of the big winning opening to the next opening (closing interval) may be included. Moreover, all the times during the right-handed instruction may be included. Furthermore, it may be included during time reduction, during probability change (during ST), and during electric support.

  If the gaming state is a special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base, so the base calculation area update process is terminated without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the sent out payout command may be used. Alternatively, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives the reception confirmation (ACK) from the payout control board 951 may be used. Further, the main control board 1310 may transmit the payout command to the payout control board 951, and the number of prize balls (the number of payout prize balls) received from the payout control board 951 of the payout completion report may be used. This variation will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Then, the acquired number of winning balls is added to the total number of winning balls to update the total number of winning balls (step S814). Note that it is determined whether there is a prize ball. If there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total prize ball number may be skipped. In addition, game balls have been won at the start winning openings 2002 and 2004, but the hold is the upper limit value, and even if the winning prize at the starting winning opening is not held, the award balls are paid out, so the total number of winning balls is updated. The Also, in a gaming state in which no winning ball is generated even if a gaming ball wins a winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), no winning ball due to the winning is generated, and the number of winning balls to be acquired is Since it is 0, the total number of winning balls is not updated. The total number of winning balls is recorded in a total winning ball number storage area (see FIG. 51) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 38, the total number of winning balls used for the base calculation is updated every time the number of winning balls is calculated.

  Thereafter, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out balls is updated so that the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the firing ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, and the like, and is acquired by reading the detection signals of these sensors in the switch input process of step S74. The total number of out balls is recorded in the total number of out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 (see FIG. 51). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 38, every time an out ball is detected, the total number of out balls used for base calculation is updated.

  Note that as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 45) described later, it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer expires, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and a prize ball abnormality notification is issued. May be stopped.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes base value calculation processing in the timer interrupt processing, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute base value calculation processing. In this case, a command for informing the base may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or a command for informing the base from the payout control unit 952 to the peripheral control unit 1511. May be sent.

  Also, even if information on both winning and out winning balls is acquired in one timer interruption process, the number of winning balls is changed to the total number of winning balls (or a winning ball buffer in the embodiment described later). The number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (or an out ball number buffer in the embodiment described later). In addition, even if information on winnings to a plurality of winning openings is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the total number of winning balls by a plurality of winnings is calculated as a total winning ball number (or a winning ball buffer in an embodiment described later). ). For this reason, the base value can be accurately calculated and displayed. For example, when a winning combination with a winning mouth sensor with five winning balls and a winning mouth sensor with three winning balls is detected, a total of eight winning balls are used as the total number of winning balls. (Or prize ball number buffer).

  In addition, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer) only when a game ball is detected to be launched. In other words, only the number of prize balls related to winnings detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the firing ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of prize balls (or prize ball number buffer). Further, the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is detected, and while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 is operating (the launch control unit 953 or the ball launching device 680 stops operating). Only the number of prize balls related to winnings detected during a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) may be added to the total number of prize balls or the prize ball number buffer. If it does in this way, reflection to the base value of a prize ball by abnormalities which detect a prize ball in the state where a game ball is not fired, or cheating can be prevented, and display of an incorrect base value can be prevented.

  In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 38, the base was calculated by excluding the number of prize balls and out balls in the special prize, but the number of prize balls due to winning in the general prize opening and the start prize opening is counted even during the special prize. Then, the base value may be calculated by counting the number of out balls excluding the number of balls that won the big winning opening.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 39, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interruption period).

  First, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by the total number of out balls (step S903).

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee. The base notification command may be simply a notification of the base value or a notification of abnormality of the base value. The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value is larger or smaller than a design value (normal value) exceeding a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that a plurality of stages of tolerances may be provided, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages depending on the degree of deviation of the base value.

  There are various methods of base notification, and either one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. For example, the base value may be reported constantly or at a predetermined timing by the base display (7-segment LED) 1317, the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244. If the base value is notified to the player, the player may be able to confirm the condition of the pachinko machine. In that case, you may apply the display mode demonstrated by the accessory ratio to a base value. When notifying the base value, the calculated base value is displayed as a percentage notation on the above-described display or display device. The value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up. On a display device capable of displaying an image such as the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. May be.

  Further, when displaying the base value on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, a predetermined reference value (for example, 50%) is provided for the base value, and when the reference value is exceeded, the display mode may be changed. . For example, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (green when normal, red when exceeding the reference). Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be changed in a plurality of stages. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, or less than 10%. It may be divided into a plurality of stages, and the display may be performed by changing the emission color such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage. Also, at each stage, you may display a masochistic comment when the base value is low, such as “I'm fine”, “I'm feeling down”, “It ’s not bad” or “It ’s amazing in a way”. If the base value exceeds the reference value, the pachinko machine is operating differently than expected and there is a possibility of fraud. For this reason, the display by the aspect which shows warnings, such as red, is desirable. The display mode may be the same as or similar to a weak error that does not stop the progress of the game. Here, the same means that at least one of the display, the lamp, and the sound is the same.

  Further, the range of the base value (such as whether the base value is high or low, whether it is an abnormal value or a normal value, etc.) may be reported for various lamps, liquid crystal display devices, sounds, and the like. Further, when the base cannot be calculated (Yes in step S902) and there is no base value calculated in the past, a base notification command indicating that base notification is impossible may be generated.

  The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the base display 1317. In this case, a specific LED lamp (or 7 segment LED) of the function display unit 1400 may be used to notify constantly. Moreover, it is good to alert | report at predetermined timing (For example, when the special symbol fluctuation | variation display game is complete | finished while the main body frame 4 is open | released).

  The base information may be output from an external terminal board to a hall computer installed in the game hall. In this case, the base information is output at a predetermined timing (for each predetermined number of winning balls and for each predetermined number of out balls) as in a base calculation / display process (FIG. 46, FIG. 48, etc.) described later. Good.

  Even if the base value is not updated, the base notification command may be generated. When the base value is not updated, the base notification command may not be generated. Even if the base notification command is not generated, the display of the base value is continued.

  Further, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 55 and the like, it is determined whether or not the calculated base value is abnormal, a base notification command for informing the base value abnormality is generated, and the base abnormality is notified to the player or hall employee. You may notify.

  Moreover, you may determine whether to alert | report the base to a player according to a game state (game situation). This is because, if the base value is always informed to the player, the player's attention to the effect of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original pleasure of the pachinko machine, may be neglected, and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. It is.

  Further, based on the calculated base value, the effect of the special symbol fluctuation display game being executed or executed in the future may be changed. For example, a plurality of display selection tables may be prepared, and an effect may be selected from different display selection tables (see FIGS. 63 to 67) depending on the base value.

  In addition, during the special symbol variation display game, the base value may exceed or fall below a predetermined threshold (for example, 30%). For this reason, when the threshold value is exceeded or falls below the special symbol variation display game, the effect of the special symbol variation display game may be changed. When the base value rises above a predetermined threshold and when it falls, the effect may be changed in the same manner, or the effect may be changed in a different manner.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example of the update timing of the number of winning balls and the calculation timing of the base value. As shown in FIG. 22, in this embodiment, the number of winning balls is updated in the base calculation area updating process in step S81, and the base value is calculated in the base ratio calculation / display process in step S89.

  Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of winning balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and calculates the base In the area update process (step S81), the prize ball number buffer is updated. Thereafter, the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89), and a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90).

  When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the winning ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. Of the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control processing (step S80), the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. When backing up the number of unpaid prize balls on the payout control board 951, the payout control board 951 needs to send a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310, but it is necessary to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of the payout of balls. Absent. On the other hand, when backing up the number of unpaid prize balls on the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951 needs to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of the payout of balls, but sends out a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. There is no need.

  In the pachinko machine according to the embodiment described above, the base value is calculated without delay during the game, and the state of the game machine can be known in real time. For this reason, abnormality of a gaming machine can be discovered at an early stage. For example, if it is determined that the base is abnormal if the base value is lower or higher than a predetermined threshold, the base value is calculated multiple times during one special symbol variation display game, and abnormally rises and falls across the predetermined threshold Even if it is determined that the base value is calculated, the base value calculation process is continuously executed regardless of the abnormality determination without stopping the game. For example, special symbol fluctuation display games include short-time games such as normal fluctuations and long-time games such as reach fluctuations, and the base value is calculated between the start and end of one special symbol fluctuation display game. When the condition to be satisfied is satisfied a plurality of times, the base value may be calculated each time, and the base value may be updated and displayed each time. This limits the calculation of the base value during the special symbol variation display game (for example, the base value is calculated and updated only once at the end of the variation display). This is because the time is not noticed, and information necessary for hall operation is not output at an appropriate timing, and the hall may be inconvenienced.

  Also, if the game ball that has been fired has not won a start winning opening or a general winning opening, the base value decreases. In this state, since the player has lost, for example, an additional effect (for example, an effect related to a winning that is not related to a change in the base value or a change in the base value appears in the effect performed on the liquid crystal) A specific effect) or a prediction effect with a high degree of expectation of jackpot (within a performance that is not related to a change in the base value, a notification effect with a high expectation such as the next notification effect or a change in the base value A notice effect with a high expectation degree (for example, a base value is displayed in rainbow display) among the specific effects that appear. Thereby, the player can reduce the discomfort felt by not winning at the start opening and the general winning opening, and can provide motivation to continue the game.

  On the other hand, if many of the game balls that have been launched win the start prize opening or the general prize opening (if they win more than the average number of past winning prizes), the base value increases. In this state, even if the result of the big hit lottery is lost, the player receives a larger amount of game balls than usual, so the disappointment of the player is reduced. The production of the variable display game may be changed to a production with low expectation.

[9-2. Variations in the number of award ball updates and base value calculation timing]
Next, variations in the update timing of the number of winning balls and the calculation timing of the base value will be described with reference to FIGS. The outline of the update timing of the number of winning balls and the calculation timing of the base value in each variation are as follows.
-FIG. 40: Calculation of the number of winning balls-> Update of the number of winning balls-> Base value calculation-> Sending out the payout command-FIG. 41: Calculation of the number of winning balls-> Updating the number of winning balls-> Sending out the payout command-> Base value calculation → Sending out command transmission → Updating the number of winning balls → Calculation of base value ・ Figure 43: Calculation of winning ball number → Sending out paying command → Command reception confirmation → Updating the number of winning balls → Calculation of base value ・ Figure 44: Calculation of winning ball number → Sending out paying command → Payout completion notice → Prize ball number update → Base value calculation The variations in FIGS. 40 to 43 are not limited to the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 38 and the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. The present invention can be applied to any base calculation area updating process and base calculation / display process.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 41, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 22, the base calculation area update process (step S81) is executed at the illustrated position, and the base ratio calculation is performed after the output data setting process (step S90). -Display processing (step S89) is executed.

  That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects a winning game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of winning balls determined for each winning mouth in the prize ball control process (step S80), and calculates the base calculation area. In the update process (step S81), the total number of winning balls (or a winning ball number buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated. Thereafter, a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90), and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

  When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the winning ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. As described above, depending on whether the number of unpaid prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951, the payout command reception confirmation or Any of the ball payout completions may be omitted.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 42, unlike the procedure of the timer interruption process shown in FIG. 22, after the output data setting process (step S90), the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89). Execute.

  That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects a winning game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process In step S90, a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Thereafter, in the base calculation area updating process (step S81), the total number of winning balls (or a winning ball number buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated with the number of winning balls corresponding to the sent out payout command, and the base ratio calculation / The base value is updated in the display process (step S89). The award ball number buffer may be updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command (even if the payout command has not been sent), instead of the number of prize balls corresponding to the sent payout command.

  When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the winning ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. As described above, depending on whether the number of unpaid prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951, the payout command reception confirmation or Any of the ball payout completions may be omitted.

  Note that the timing at which the main control MPU 1311 receives the command reception confirmation and the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 depends on the processing speed of the payout control board 951 and the operating speed of the payout device 830. The order of step S81) and base ratio calculation / display processing (step S89) is not limited.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 43, unlike the procedure of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 22, after receiving the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process (Step S89) is executed.

  That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects a winning game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process In step S90, a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

  When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310.

  When the main control MPU 1311 receives the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update processing (step S81), the main control MPU 1311 receives the total number of prize balls (the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the command reception confirmation has been received ( Alternatively, the winning ball number buffer in the embodiment described later is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

  Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the winning ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. In the procedure shown in FIG. 43, the data on the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up on the payout control board 951 in order not to lose the data on the number of unpaid prize balls when a power failure occurs. For this reason, command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310 is necessary, but the ball payout completion notice may be omitted.

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, unlike the procedure of the timer interruption process shown in FIG. 22, after receiving the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process (Step S89) is executed.

  That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects a winning game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process In step S90, a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

  When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the winning ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout.

  When the main control MPU 1311 receives the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update process (step S81) receives the total number of winning balls (or in the embodiment described later) as the number of winning balls that have been paid out. The award ball number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

  In the procedure shown in FIG. 43, data on the number of unpaid prize balls is not backed up when a power failure occurs, so the main control board 1310 backs up the data on the number of unpaid prize balls. For this reason, the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310 is necessary, but the command reception confirmation may be omitted.

  As described above, the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment updates the number of winning balls and the number of out balls, which are parameters used for the base calculation, when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, in the processing shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, when the winning mouth sensor detects a winning of a game ball in the switch input processing (step S74), the number of winning balls is updated. In the process shown in FIG. 42, the number of winning balls is updated when a payout command is transmitted. In the process shown in FIG. 43, the number of prize balls is updated when reception of the payout command is confirmed. In the process shown in FIG. 44, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout of prize balls is completed.

  In the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the number of prize balls in the special prize cannot be accurately counted due to a difference between the determination timing as to whether the gaming state is a special prize and the update timing of the number of prize balls. In particular, the problem increases when the time from winning a prize to updating the number of winning balls is long. For this reason, a flag is attached to the winning prize in the special prize, and the flag is taken over for the number of winning balls, the payout command, the reception confirmation, and the payout completion notice. Then, using the flag, it is determined whether the winning ball is a special prize at each stage. In this way, even if it takes a long time from winning the winning opening to updating the number of winning balls, it is possible to accurately count and update the number of winning balls in the special prize.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine of a present Example, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are updated by these opportunities, and a base value is calculated and displayed. That is, since the base value can be known by a single gaming machine, the time required for nail adjustment in the manufacturing process and inspection process can be shortened, and the gaming machine can be manufactured efficiently.

  In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the pachinko machine is out of balls and the prize balls cannot be paid out, the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls.

  When the main control board 1310 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning port sensor detects a winning game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning port where the winning is detected is not yet determined. Add to the number of balls to be paid out. The number of unpaid balls may have a predetermined upper limit, but may not have an upper limit. In this case, each time the number of prize balls to be paid out is calculated, the prize ball number buffer or the total number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated. Further, the number of prize balls may be updated after a payout command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951.

  On the other hand, when the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning hole from which the winning is detected when the winning hole sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74). The payout command is sent to the payout control board 951. Even when the pachinko machine is out of balls and the prize balls cannot be paid out, a payout command is transmitted and the number of unpaid balls is held by the payout control board 951. In this case, each time a payout command is transmitted, the winning ball buffer or the total winning ball number for calculating the base value may be updated.

  Further, when the payout control board 951 receives a payout command, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated. Note that this prize ball number may have a predetermined upper limit, but may not have an upper limit. Also, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated every time the prize balls are actually paid out. The payout control board 951 transmits the number of prize balls for calculating the base value to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 calculates the base value using the received number of prize balls.

  In addition, as will be described later in FIG. 46, without comparing the award ball number buffer value and the threshold Th1, every predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) or every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Steps S891 and S892 may be executed.

  As described above, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be updated at various timings. However, when the number of prize balls is updated, the base value is calculated without delay, and the base indicator 1317 displays the real time. The base value may be calculated and displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, every minute).

[9-3. Timing of renewing the number of winning balls and calculating the base value]
Next, variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
FIG. 38 and FIG. 39: Base value is calculated every time the timer interruption period. FIG. 45 and FIG. 46: Base value is calculated for each predetermined prize ball number. FIG. 47 and FIG. 48: Base value is calculated for each predetermined out ball number. Calculation-Fig. 49 and Fig. 50: Base value is updated when one of the number of winning balls and the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation region update process (step S81). The base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 45 records the number of prize balls in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls meets a predetermined condition (step S813). In FIG. 45, the same steps as those in the above-described base calculation area updating process (FIG. 38) are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a special prize (step S810). If the gaming state is a special prize, it is a prize ball that is not related to the calculation of the base, so the process advances to step S824 without updating the number of prize balls or the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not a special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811).

  Then, it is determined whether there is a prize ball, that is, whether the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more (step S812). As a result, if there is no prize ball, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the prize ball number. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, the acquired prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813). In addition, whenever it adds to a prize ball number buffer, you may output a prize ball number to the hall computer installed in the game hall from the external terminal board, or when the number of prize balls mentioned later becomes more than predetermined threshold Th1 Alternatively, the threshold value Th1 may be output from the external terminal board to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and temporarily stores the number of prize balls to be paid out by the gaming machine 1.

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815). For example, an anomaly in the number of winning balls means that a large number of winning balls (for example, 10 or more winnings per minute considering the number of winning balls in a general winning opening or starting winning opening) are obtained at a predetermined time other than during the special prize. This is the case. Note that a plurality of stages of allowable ranges may be provided, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages depending on the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of winning balls.

  As a result, if there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) to notify the player or hall employee that the winning ball is abnormal. There are various methods for notifying abnormality, and one of the methods described below may be used, or two or more methods may be combined. For example, the abnormality of the number of prize balls may be notified by various lamps, liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244, sound, or the like. Further, the abnormality of the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board to the hall computer installed in the game hall. Furthermore, the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal may not be used for calculating the base value. In this case, a prize ball may be paid out to the player. In addition, when the number of prize balls is determined to be abnormal and the above-described notification means (sound, lamp, LED, liquid crystal display, information output from an external terminal board, etc.) is used for notification, the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal is used as a base. It may be used to calculate a value. Further, the game may be temporarily stopped. Specifically, the main control board 1310 initializes all data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and initializes all data in the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 even if the RAM clear switch is not operated. Then, the game is started from the operation confirmation in the initial state. As another method of stopping the game, the game is temporarily stopped (for example, the special symbol variation display is stopped), and after the error notification is stopped, the game is resumed by returning to the original state. For this reason, even if the power failure monitoring circuit does not detect a drop in the power supply voltage, a power failure detection signal is output, and the main control MPU 1311 backs up all data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 and stops the game. After the error notification is completed, the data in the main control built-in RAM 1312 is restored from the backup area, and the game is resumed. At this time, the peripheral control unit 1511 waits for a command from the main control board 1310 in the state as it is, so the suspended game is resumed by resuming the operation of the main control board 1310. However, 100 game balls (that is, out balls) are fired into the game area 5a, and all game balls may win the general winning opening or starting winning opening. The mode of notification is desirably a quiet mode (for example, lower volume and lower light intensity than normal error notification) that is less urgent than a normal error (such as a magnetic sensor error). Also, the display time may be the same as a normal error or may be a short time. In some cases, the notification time may be 0 seconds and the notification may not be performed.

  Then, the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817), and counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

  Thereafter, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out balls is updated so that the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer started in step S817 has expired (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer expires, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S825). In step S824, the end of notification is determined by the time of a timer for notifying a prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the notification end is determined so as to notify a prize ball abnormality for a predetermined number of shot balls. May be. Moreover, you may continue alert | reporting abnormality until a hall employee confirms.

  In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 45, it is determined in step S815 whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, but after acquiring the number of out balls, there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls in comparison with the number of out balls. (That is, whether there is an abnormality in the base value). For example, when the number of winning balls exceeding the number of out balls at a predetermined time is counted, or when considering the number of winning balls in the general winning opening or starting winning opening, winning out is a high percentage (for example, 50% or more) This is the case.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 46, the base value is updated at a timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 46, the same parts as those in the base calculation / display process (FIG. 39) described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of winning balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1. For example, the number of prize balls may be compared with a threshold value Th1, or may be determined by a predetermined bit value in the prize ball number storage area (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is configured by 8 bits). If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). In addition, a determination result obtained by comparing the number of prize balls and the threshold Th1 in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 45) is recorded in a flag. In the base calculation / display process (FIG. 46), the number of prize balls is determined by the flag. It may be determined whether it is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1.

  If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing for calculating the base value, and the base calculation / display processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). That is, if the game situation is such that the number of prize balls counted from a predetermined starting point satisfies a predetermined condition (the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1), the fractional part of the number of prize balls is calculated. Remaining (the fraction obtained by subtracting the threshold Th1 from the prize ball number buffer is left in the prize ball number buffer), the other part is stored in the memory (the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number), and used for the base calculation. Execute the process. Specifically, when the threshold Th1 is 100, the number of winning ball buffers is 99, and when five winning balls are generated by winning a general winning opening, the number of winning ball buffers is 104. However, 100 are moved to the total number of winning balls and used for calculating the base value, and the remaining four are left in the winning ball number buffer. In this case, the count of the four prize balls remaining in the prize ball number buffer is used for the calculation of the base when the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold value Th1. Further, although the threshold Th1 = 100 has been described, other numerical values such as 1000 may be used. However, if a large threshold Th1 is set so that the base is not calculated even if the jackpot is obtained, fraudulent discovery may be delayed, so the threshold Th1 is equal to or less than the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot (multiple types If there is a big hit (for example, a big win of 4 rounds and 8 rounds), it may be set to be equal to or less than the minimum value of the number of winning balls for the big win. Moreover, it is good to update a base value frequently from a viewpoint of discovering fraud early. For example, the threshold Th1 is preferably 10 instead of 100 in that the base value is frequently updated.

  It should be noted that steps S891 and S892 may be executed for each predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) without comparing the award ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1. Further, steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) without comparing the prize ball number buffer value with the threshold Th1. This predetermined time may be measured by a timer that operates in the main control MPU 1311 or may be measured by an output of an RTC (real time clock).

  Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). When the total number of out balls is 0, the base value is calculated, but it may not be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In either case, the base value displayed on the base indicator 1317 is not updated.

  As will be described later with reference to FIG. 51, the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative numbers since the start of operation of the pachinko machine 1, but the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are the same. You may initialize at a timing (for example, every predetermined number of winning balls, every predetermined number of out balls).

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee.

  As described above, the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal every time the number of prize balls is acquired, so that an illegal act can be detected early. This is because during normal games, a considerable number of game balls (for example, 50% of the number of fired balls) will not win in the general winning opening 2001 or the starting winning openings 2002 and 2004 with a high probability. Therefore, it is determined and notified of an abnormality in winning in a winning opening that is always open (general winning opening 2001 or start winning opening 2002, 2004).

  Further, in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition, so that an accurate base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, since the base value is calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number, the amount of calculation required to calculate the base value is reduced as compared with the case where the base value is calculated for each prize ball. it can. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and the new base value is notified. Until then, the conventional base value is notified. Is done.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation region update processing (step S81). The base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 47 records the out ball number in the out ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the out ball number satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 47, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the base calculation area updating process described above, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810), the number of prize balls in the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If the result of determination in step S812 is that there is a winning ball, the acquired winning ball number is added to the total winning ball number (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 47, every time the number of prize balls is calculated, the total number of prize balls used for base calculation is updated.

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815). If there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

  Thereafter, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer expires, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

  Further, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls. For this reason, for example, when a game ball is won at the start winning opening and it is determined that a pre-reading effect is generated, and the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a different mode (flashing display, red hold, etc.) The player expects that the special symbol variation display game corresponding to the pre-read hold will be a big hit, but if the special symbol variation display game is lost, the player is discouraged. Even in such a case, if the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of winning balls as in this embodiment, the player's discouragement as described above can be reduced. This is because calculation of the base is delayed from the award ball generation timing, so that the base value increased by the award ball due to winning at the start opening is notified. That is, even when it is determined that the pre-reading effect is executed at the time of winning at the start winning opening, the predetermined number (for example, threshold Th1 = 100) is added even if the number of prize balls paid out at the winning at the starting winning opening is added. If the value does not reach), the base value is not updated. That is, the base value displayed to the player has not changed. However, since the prize ball was obtained, the base value should rise (only the lower numerical value changes due to the number of display digits, and the display may not change). For this reason, even if the pre-reading effect described above is off, the player thinks that the base value will increase later (that is, the tone is good) and can suppress a decrease in interest. In other words, even when it is determined to execute the pre-reading effect, the base value is not updated if the prize ball buffer value has not reached the predetermined number (threshold value Th1). Further, when it is determined that the pre-reading effect is to be executed and the prize ball buffer value reaches a predetermined number, the calculation of the base value may be delayed until the prize ball buffer value reaches the predetermined number next time. .

  Note that the player may be able to select whether the calculation of the base value is delayed or calculated without delay. For example, the operation button 220C can be selected at the start of the game. Further, the base value calculation timing may be determined by lottery. In addition, when it is determined to perform the pre-reading effect, it is preferable to execute an effect capable of notifying a delay in calculation of the base value. Note that if the special symbol variation display game hold memory has reached the upper limit, the jackpot lottery is not executed even if the start winning opening is won. Even in this case, the prize balls are paid out in accordance with the winning at the start winning opening, so the number of prize balls is counted and used to calculate the base value. In the event of a specific error, if the winning prize is not paid out even if the start prize opening or the general prize opening is won, and the prize ball is not paid out, the number of prize balls is not counted. The value is not updated.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 48, the base value is updated at a timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 48, the same parts as those in the base calculation / display process described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the out number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2. For example, the number of out balls may be compared with a threshold Th2, or may be determined by a value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out balls (specifically, the storage area for the number of out balls may be configured with 8 bits. If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). In addition, a determination result obtained by comparing the number of out balls and the threshold value Th2 in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 47) is recorded in a flag. In the base calculation / display process (FIG. 48), the number of out balls is determined by the flag. It may be determined whether it is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2.

  If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not time to calculate the base value, so the base calculation / display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the out ball count buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out ball count (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball count buffer (step S900). Note that steps S899 and S900 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) without comparing the out-ball number buffer value with the threshold Th2.

  Thereafter, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by the total number of out balls (step S903).

  The total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative numbers since the start of operation of the pachinko machine 1, but the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are the same timing (for example, a predetermined prize) It may be initialized (for each number of balls, for each predetermined number of out balls).

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee. The base notification command may be simply a notification of the base value, a notification of the base value with a specific effect, or a notification of an abnormality in the base value.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value can be updated and displayed every time the number of out balls (the number of shot balls) reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing. In addition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that pursues fun.

  In addition, the number of winning balls is added to the total number of winning balls every time a winning ball (winning detection, payout command transmission, payout command arrival, winning ball payout completion, etc.) is obtained. This is because the base value may not be calculated correctly if it is confirmed whether a predetermined condition is satisfied when adding the number of prize balls (for example, if there is an out ball corresponding to the prize ball). For example, even if the firing is not performed for a predetermined time (about 1 minute), the ball-hanging state caused by the game ball being caught by the nail disposed in the game area is resolved, and the game ball is delayed at the winning opening. This is because there is a case of winning a prize. For this reason, it is desirable to update the number of prize balls regardless of the presence or absence of out balls.

  When both the out ball count and the out ball count buffer value are smaller than the threshold Th2, it may be displayed that the out ball count buffer value is a fraction smaller than the threshold Th2, or the out ball count buffer value may be displayed.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, since the base value is calculated at the timing when the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number, it is necessary to calculate the base value rather than calculating the base value every time an out ball is detected. The amount of calculation can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and the new base value is notified. Until then, the conventional base value is notified. Is done.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating another example of the base calculation region update processing (step S81). The base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 49 records the number of prize balls in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at a timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls meets a predetermined condition. Record the number of out balls in the out ball number buffer. In FIG. 49, the same step number is assigned to the same part as the base calculation area updating process described above, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810), the number of prize balls in the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If there is a prize ball, the obtained prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815). If there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

  Thereafter, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer expires, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 50, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of winning balls or the number of out balls meets a predetermined condition. In FIG. 50, the same steps as those in the above-described base calculation / display processing are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the winning ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not time to update the total winning ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out ball number buffer value is added to the total out ball number (step S893), and the out ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or every predetermined time without comparing the winning ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the time to update the total out-ball number, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

  Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by the total number of out balls (step S903).

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee. The base notification command may be simply a notification of the base value or a notification of abnormality of the base value. Note that the base notification command may be generated every time the base value is calculated, or the base notification command may not be generated even if the base value is calculated.

  In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 50, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of winning balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the base calculation area 13128.

  The data of the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area 13128 is obtained from the base calculation area update process and the base calculation / display process (FIGS. 38, 45, 46, 47, executed by the main control MPU 1311). 48, FIG. 50, etc.) and read by the base calculation / display processing (FIG. 39, FIG. 46, FIG. 48, FIG. 50, etc.). Further, the data of the winning ball number buffer and the out ball number buffer in the base calculation area 13128 are written by the base calculation area update processing (FIG. 45, FIG. 47, FIG. 49, etc.) executed by the main control MPU 1311, and the base calculation is performed. Read out by display processing (FIGS. 46, 48, 50, etc.) For this reason, the base calculation area update process and the base calculation / display process can be configured separately from the timer interrupt process (game control program). it can.

  FIG. 51A shows an example of the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 51A, a winning ball number buffer, a total winning ball number, an out ball number buffer, a winning ball number buffer, a specific winning ball number buffer, a total out ball number, and a base are stored. The award ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of award balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize, and is based on a case where the award ball number satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of award balls). Is used to calculate The total number of winning balls is the total number of winning balls that are paid out to the player other than during the special prize. The out ball buffer is the number of game balls fired by the player other than during the special prize, and is used to calculate the base when the out ball number satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, every predetermined number of out balls). It is done. The winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of balls won in the general winning port or the starting winning port. The specific winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of balls won in a specific general winning opening or start winning opening. The winning ball number buffer is used when the number of out balls is counted based on the number of balls passing through the outlet (FIGS. 54 and 55). The specific winning ball number buffer is used when the number of out balls is corrected by the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening (FIGS. 70 and 71). The total number of out-balls is the total number of game balls that the player has launched other than during the special prize. The base is calculated by total number of winning balls / total number of out balls × 100, and is a numerical value expressed as a percentage, and is calculated in step S903 of the base calculation / display processing.

  In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 51A, the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls correspond to the total areas of FIG. 51B, which will be described later, and each has a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes. A numerical value up to 16777215 or 4294967295 can be stored as a decimal number. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. The base is a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total total of the base shown in FIG. 51B, which will be described later, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal. A capacity that can be recorded with a decimal base value may be allocated.

  FIG. 51B shows another example of a work area structure using a ring buffer. In the work area structure shown in FIG. 51 (B), a winning ball number buffer, a total winning ball number, an out ball number buffer, a winning ball number buffer, a specific winning ball number buffer, a total out ball number, and a base are stored. Each data item is the same as the description in FIG. The storage area for the total number of winning balls and the total number of out-balls is n storage areas (for example, for every 6000 winning balls) for every predetermined number of winning balls (or every predetermined number of out-balls, every predetermined time). n = 10 storage areas), and when the number of award balls reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer for all data moves, and the storage area in which the data is updated changes. . Then, after data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. Note that the writing pointer may be moved when data other than the number of winning balls (the number of out balls, a predetermined time, etc.) reaches a predetermined number.

  Note that the write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all data strings move for each predetermined number of prize balls. Also, the read pointer moves as the write pointer moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is because the base value is calculated using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

  The total of the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the base total value is the total of the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls. When the ring buffer goes around and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the accumulated value is excluded by excluding the data in the cleared area. Recalculated. The total total of each data is the total value of all data collected in the past, the value of the base total total calculated from the total value is the value calculated from the total total value of each data, and the ring buffer Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data, the total accumulated value including the original data in the cleared area is calculated.

  In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 51B, the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls in the ring buffer are each a 2-byte storage area, and numerical values up to 65535 can be stored in decimal. Since the cumulative total is the sum of the data for 6000 prize balls × n (60000 prize balls when n = 10), a large storage area is prepared. The total of the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 can be stored in decimal. Since the total total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. Each of the base total and total is a 1-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal. A capacity that can be recorded with a decimal base value may be allocated.

  In the data structure shown in FIG. 51A, stored data is not erased. Therefore, even if the data in the base calculation area 13128 is erased every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Good. Similarly, the total accumulation in FIG. 51B may be deleted every predetermined period.

  Further, when the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but all data in the base calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Further, it may be notified that the data in the base calculation area 13128 and the calculated base value are abnormal. Alternatively, the base value may be calculated again after checking the data in the backup area using the check code and copying the data in the normal backup area to the main area.

[9-4. Base value display]
The base value calculated as described above may continue to be displayed while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but when the main body frame 4 is closed and a game is possible, the base indicator 1317 is visually recognized. Since this is not possible, the 7-segment LED 13172 may be turned off to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. Of course, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation / display process (step S89) are executed even when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off.

  The base indicator 1317 may always display the base value or may display the base value by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318 which is a push button switch is pressed, the display of the base value is started, and after the display for a predetermined time, the display is turned off. When the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the base value may be displayed on the base indicator 1317. That is, if the main body frame 4 is not open, the base indicator 1317 does not display the accessory ratio even if the display switch 1318 is operated.

  In addition, when the main body frame 4 is opened, a predetermined display may be displayed in all digits so that it can be confirmed that the base indicator 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 35B, “-” may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

  When the body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the base indicator 1317 is performed (FIG. 35E). After a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off. The power consumption of the gaming machine may be reduced. This base non-display state is the same mode as after the initial setting is completed (FIG. 35B), but may be a different mode as long as it is distinguishable from the displayed base value.

  The base display 1317 may be shared by the function display unit 1400. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the gaming status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame opening switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the base value. Even if the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, the progress of the game may be continued. By continuing the progress of the game, it is possible to quickly switch from the base display to the display of the game state when the main body frame 4 is closed. For example, the base value is displayed when the main frame 4 is opened during the special symbol variation display game, but if the main frame 4 is closed before the variation time elapses, the variation can be displayed for the remaining time. . Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol stops at the timing when the special symbol variation display on the function display unit 1400 stops. For this reason, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the base value, the player can be configured not to feel uncomfortable.

  Further, even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the calculated base value (in the above-described embodiment, the accessory ratio) may be displayed on the base indicator (the accessory ratio indicator) 1317. If it does in this way, since a base value (commodity ratio) can be checked, without opening the main body frame 4, the fall of operation of a game machine can be suppressed. Further, it is not necessary to determine whether the main body frame 4 is open. In addition, in an island facility where pachinko machines are installed on both sides, when the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side is opened, the back side of the pachinko machine installed on the opposite side can be seen. In such a gaming machine, by opening the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side, it is possible to check the bases (role ratio) of the two pachinko machines installed back to back. Further, when the base value is displayed even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the base value is displayed in a form that can be recognized by the player (for example, a display device that displays the effect of the special symbol variation display game or a display device attached to the frame). Should be displayed. This is because the base value can be used as a barometer representing the tone of the pachinko machine and is worth seeing by the player. When the base value is calculated by the main control board 1310, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control device 1510. When the base value is calculated by the payout control board 951, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control device 1510. Further, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted via the relay board.

  In the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the light amount (luminance) of the base display 1317 is not changed even when the energy saving mode is entered. This is because if the light amount of the base display 1317 is reduced during the energy saving mode, it is difficult to check the base value by the base display 1317 when adjusting the pachinko machine other than the opening time.

  Specifically, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is in a standby state when a predetermined time elapses after a game ball is not won in any winning opening and the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is consumed. . In the standby state, the peripheral control unit 1511 continuously outputs BGM output with so-called normal fluctuation. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the standby state, the demo state is entered. In the demo state, a video showing the motif of the gaming machine is played, or the gaming machine is explained. Furthermore, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the demo state, the mode shifts to the energy saving mode (note that it is not necessary to distinguish between the demo state and the energy saving mode). In the energy saving mode, the light amounts of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244 and various lamps controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 are reduced in order to reduce power consumption. However, since the power consumption of the display devices (function display unit 1400 and base display 1317) controlled by the main control board 1310 is smaller than the power consumption of the entire pachinko machine, the amount of light of these display devices is not reduced. Also good. Also, if the light quantity of the function display unit 1400 is not reduced, a player who wants to play on an empty board can easily see the result of the previous lottery.

  In addition, even if the game ball does not win the start winning port or the general winning port, when the game ball is launched toward the game area and an out ball is detected, the displayed base value is recalculated and updated. there is a possibility. Even if game balls are fired and the number of out balls increases, if the number of prize balls does not increase, the calculated base value decreases, but some players burn in revenge.

  By informing such a player of the state of the game with the function display unit 1400 that also serves as the base display 1317, the interest of the game can be revived. That is, even if the mode is switched to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, the display mode of the display on which the base value is displayed is maintained at the light amount before shifting to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, or the player increases the light amount. It is good to be able to confirm the base value properly.

  As described above, the maintenance or increase of the light amount of the display unit on which the base value is displayed has been described. Good. For example, a predetermined operation during the energy saving mode (a launch stop button for forcibly stopping the launch, an effect operation button for changing the displayed effect, a RAM clear button for clearing the contents of the RAM, and the power to the gaming machine When an operation of an operation means provided in a gaming machine such as a supply adjustment button for switching between supply and non-supply is detected, the light amount of the display on which the base value is displayed may be reduced. Furthermore, not only in the energy saving mode, but if the above-mentioned predetermined operation is performed, the light quantity of both the lamp that reduces power consumption and the indicator that displays the base value during the energy saving mode is reduced or turned off. Also good.

  When the light intensity of both the lamp and the display unit displaying the base value is reduced or turned off, the light intensity of the lamp or the like that reduces power consumption during the energy saving mode is reduced before the display unit displaying the base value. In this case, the amount of light of a lamp or the like with high power consumption is reduced first, and the power consumption is greatly reduced. In addition, the indicator that displays the base value may be turned off before the lamp or the like, and the light quantity of the indicator that displays the base value may be reduced or turned off. In this case, the gorgeousness of the gaming machine is maintained even in the energy saving mode. There is an effect. In addition, the lamp that reduces power consumption and the indicator that displays the base value may be reduced or turned off at the same time during the energy saving mode. In this case, the amount of power consumption can be increased and the energy saving effect is high. . In addition, before and after the time in these explanations (meaning “first” or “simultaneously”) includes the order of internal processing timing and the order of appearance from the player.

  Further, the display mode of the base value may be set in a plurality of stages, and the display mode of each stage may be changed. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, or less than 10%. Divide into multiple stages. A display for displaying the base value may be configured by a multi-color LED, and may be displayed by changing the emission color such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage. In addition, the display unit that displays the base value is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and the base value is low at each stage, such as “Good condition”, “Good condition”, “Not good”, “In some sense, great” Sometimes a masochistic comment may be displayed. Furthermore, without changing the display mode of the display that displays the base value, the effect of adding the comment as described above may be executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 on which the decorative design is displayed.

[9-5. Calculation of the base using the number of balls passing through the outlet]
Next, further variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the processing described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55, the number of out balls is calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the outlet, and the base value is calculated. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
FIG. 53 and FIG. 39: Base value is calculated every time the timer interruption period. FIG. 54 and FIG. 55: Base value is calculated for each predetermined number of winning balls and every predetermined number of out balls. The description of the pattern for calculating the base value and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out-balls is omitted, but can be realized by combining FIGS.

  If the out sphere is detected by the out-port passing sphere sensor 1021 provided in the vicinity of the out-port 1111, there is a problem that the exact number of out-spheres cannot be counted. This is because the game ball launched toward the game area 5a flows out of the game area 5a through the general winning port 2001, the starting winning port 2002, and the big winning ports 2005 and 2006 in addition to the out port 1111. For this reason, the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 cannot accurately count the number of game balls fired toward the game area 5a. Therefore, in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, the number of out balls is accurately calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the outlet, and the base value is accurately calculated.

  FIG. 52 is a front view showing another example of the game board.

  The game board of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment has substantially the same structure as the game board shown in FIG. 10, but is provided at the lower part of the game area 5a and flows out of the game area 5a through the out port 1111 (out An out-mouth passing ball sensor 1021 for detecting the number of passing balls) is provided. The out port passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position where the player can see through the out port 1111. By installing the out mouth passing ball sensor 1021 at a position where the player can see through the out mouth 1111, it is possible to make it aware that the out balls have been counted, that is, the base has been calculated.

  Further, the outlet opening ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position that is not seen by the player, such as a collective basket in which game balls flowing down from the gaming area 5a through the outlet slot 1111 are aligned. If the player is installed at a position where the player cannot visually recognize, it is not necessary for the player to be conscious of counting out balls. Moreover, by providing the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 on the back side of the out-port 1111, a sufficient place for placing the liquid crystal display device and the accessory (movable body) can be secured, and the degree of freedom in designing the game board 5 is improved. it can. Further, in order to prevent double counting of the game balls, the game balls that have passed the out-portion passing ball sensor 1021 are prevented from bouncing back on the rolling surface on which the game balls have passed. It is better to add a slope or a curved surface.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 53, the number of winning balls, the number of passing out mouths, and the number of winning balls are acquired in order to calculate the base value using the number of passing out balls at each timer interruption period. In FIG. 53, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the base calculation area updating process described above, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810), the number of prize balls in the special prize is obtained (step S811), and the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 53, every time the number of winning balls is calculated, the total number of winning balls used for the base calculation is updated. Note that it is determined whether there is a prize ball. If there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total prize ball number may be skipped.

  Thereafter, the number of out-passage balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820). Then, the sum of the number of out mouth passing balls and the number of winning balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 53, every time an out ball or a winning ball is detected, the total number of out balls used for base calculation is updated.

  Note that, as in steps S815 to S817 of the above-described base calculation area update process (FIG. 45), it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 in FIG. 45, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer expires, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

  After recording the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 53, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation / display process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). The base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 54 records the number of prize balls in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls meets a predetermined condition. The number of balls passing through the outlet is recorded in the out ball buffer, and the number of winning balls is recorded in the winning ball buffer. In FIG. 54, the same parts as those in the base calculation area updating process described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810), the number of prize balls in the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If there is a prize ball, the obtained prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815). If there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

  Thereafter, the number of out-portion passing spheres is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out-portion passing spheres is added to the out-ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820), and the acquired number of winning balls is added to the winning ball number buffer (step S821).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer expires, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

  In the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 53, the sum of the acquired number of out-passage balls and winning balls is added to one storage area (total number of out balls), and the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. Then, the acquired number of out-passage balls and the number of winning balls are added to another storage area (out ball buffer, winning ball buffer). As described above, the number of balls passing through the outlet and the number of winning balls may be recorded in one storage area or in another storage area.

  Also, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, when the acquired number of out-passage balls and the number of winning balls are recorded in different storage areas, the number of out-balls increases by one when winning a winning opening. The counting of the number of balls passing through the outlet and the counting of the number of winning balls are executed simultaneously (within one timer interrupt process), but the base value is calculated after updating both the out ball number buffer and the winning ball number buffer. At that time, if both the out-ball number buffer and the winning ball number buffer cannot be updated within one timer interrupt process, whether to count the number of out-passing balls or the number of winning balls Should be determined in advance, rather than determined by lottery. At that time, if the process relating to the prize ball is prioritized over the other processes, the prize ball payout process can be executed quickly, but may be determined as appropriate according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 55, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of winning balls or the number of out balls meets a predetermined condition. In FIG. 55, the same steps as those in the above-described base calculation / display processing are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the winning ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the time to update the total winning ball number, so the process proceeds to step S896. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out ball number buffer value is added to the total out ball number (step S893), and the out ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or every predetermined time without comparing the winning ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the sum of the number of out-passage balls stored in the out-ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball-number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S896). ). The sum of the number of balls passing through the outlet and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area, which is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated number of out balls is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the time to update the total number of out balls, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out balls is greater than or equal to the threshold Th2, the prize ball number buffer value is added to the total prize ball number (step S897), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, the winning ball number buffer value is added to the out ball number buffer, and the threshold Th2 is subtracted (step S901). . Note that steps S896 to S901 may be executed for each predetermined number of winnings or every predetermined time without comparing the number of out balls (out ball number buffer value + winning ball number buffer value) and the threshold value Th2.

  Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by the total number of out balls (step S903).

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee.

  In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 55, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of winning balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of winning balls is calculated by adding the number of winning balls to the number of balls passing through the outlet, so the number of out balls is accurately counted and the base value is accurately calculated. it can. Further, by confirming the base value in the manufacturing process and inspection process of the gaming machine, it is possible to confirm whether the winning opening switch, the base indicator 1317 and the process for calculating the base value are normal.

[9-6. Announcement of base abnormality]
The process described above generates a command for notifying the calculated base value. Next, a process for determining abnormality of the base value and notifying the abnormality will be described.
FIG. 56: Base value is calculated every time the timer interrupt period is performed. FIG. 57: Base value is calculated for each predetermined number of winning balls and predetermined number of out balls. Although description of the pattern for calculating the base value for each number of out balls is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIG. 56 and FIG.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 56, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interruption period).

  First, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated, and the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by the total number of out balls (step S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value is larger or smaller than a design value (normal value) exceeding a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that a plurality of stages of tolerances may be provided, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages depending on the degree of deviation of the base value. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display process is terminated. As a method for notifying the abnormality of the base, the same method as the above-described notification of the base can be adopted.

  For example, one or more of the methods described below may be combined. Specifically, the base value (7-segment LED) 1317, the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244 and the like may be notified of abnormality of the base value. If the player is informed of the abnormality of the base value, the player may be able to confirm the abnormality of the pachinko machine. The calculated base value may be displayed as a percentage notation on the above-described display or display device to notify the abnormality of the base value. The value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up. On a display device capable of displaying an image such as the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. May be.

  Further, when the base value is displayed on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the display mode may be changed if the base value is abnormal. For example, the value is displayed by blinking or changing the color (green during normal operation, red during abnormal operation). Furthermore, the display mode of the base value may be changed in a plurality of stages. Specifically, the displayed base value is 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, or less than 10%. It may be divided into a plurality of stages, and the display may be performed by changing the emission color such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage.

  Further, the range of the base value (such as whether the base value is high or low, whether it is an abnormal value or a normal value, etc.) may be reported for various lamps, liquid crystal display devices, sounds, and the like. The function display unit 1400 may notify the abnormality of the base value. Also, information on the base abnormality may be output from the external terminal board to the hall computer installed in the game hall.

  The base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 56 is performed by calculating the total number of winning balls and the number of out balls at the timing when the number of winning balls and the number of out balls satisfy a predetermined condition as shown in FIGS. 49 and 54, for example. It may be used in combination with the base calculation area updating process to be updated.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 57, the base value is updated at a timing when either the number of winning balls or the number of out balls meets a predetermined condition. In FIG. 57, the same parts as those in the base calculation / display process described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the winning ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not time to update the total winning ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out ball number buffer value is added to the total out ball number (step S893), and the out ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or every predetermined time without comparing the winning ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the time to update the total out-ball number, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

  Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by the total number of out balls (step S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value is larger or smaller than a design value (normal value) exceeding a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that a plurality of stages of tolerances may be provided, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages depending on the degree of deviation of the base value. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display process is terminated.

  In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 57, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of winning balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

  In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 57, for example, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 53, the total number of winning balls and the number of out balls are directly updated using the acquired number of winning balls and out balls. It may be used in combination with the base calculation area updating process.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the calculated base value is abnormal, the abnormality is notified, so that the player can know the state of the gaming machine, and the hall employee It is possible to know the possibility of an unauthorized operation on the gaming machine. Further, it is possible to detect and notify an abnormality of a gaming machine that cannot be found by conventional error detection.

[9-7. Notification of base change]
Next, an embodiment of a gaming machine that notifies a change in the calculated base value will be described.

  Naturally, the base value calculated by a pachinko machine goes up and down. Since the base value represents the state of the gaming machine, the player who is playing the game is concerned about the change of the base value in addition to the base value itself. For this reason, notification of the change of the base value to a player is desired. When a display indicating the upper and lower base values appears, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display processing shown in FIG. 58, the history of the calculated base value is recorded in order to compare the current base value with the history of the past base value. In FIG. 58, the same steps as those in the base calculation / display process described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the winning ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not time to update the total winning ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out ball number buffer value is added to the total out ball number (step S893), and the out ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or every predetermined time without comparing the winning ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the time to update the total out-ball number, and the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th2, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

  Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by the total number of out balls (step S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the base value management timer has expired (step S904). If the base value management timer is not up, it is not time to store the base value in the base history, and the base calculation / display processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the base value management timer is up, the base value is stored in the base history (step S905), and the base value management timer is reset (step S906).

  The base value management timer is a timer used for recording a base value every predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), and stores the current base value in the base history every time the base value management timer expires. The base history is stored in the base calculation area 13128. Only one base history may be stored in the base calculation area 13128, or a plurality of base histories may be stored in the base calculation area 13128. When a plurality of base histories are stored in the base calculation area 13128, a ring buffer may be formed in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, a predetermined time × 10 base values may be stored. In addition, as shown in FIG. 51, a ring buffer for the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls is configured in the base calculation area 13128, for example, a predetermined time × n number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are stored. The base value may be calculated as necessary.

  Thereafter, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player or hall employee.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the display selection process. The display selection process is called from the display data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 59).

  First, the MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 selects a specific base history (for example, the latest past base value) stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value. Is determined (step S10301). As a result, if the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value, the base decrease duration measurement timer is referred to determine whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the base value decrease. (Step S10302). If the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the base decrease, an effect table in which the base is decreasing is selected (step S10303). On the other hand, if a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of base reduction, an effect table in which base reduction is continuing is selected (step S10304).

  On the other hand, if the selected base history value is not smaller (equal or larger) than the current base value, the base decrease duration measurement timer is reset (step S10305), and the display selection table in which the base is increasing is selected (step S10306). ).

  In the display selection process described above, it is determined in step S10301 whether the current base value is smaller than the base history value, but the current base value is compared with the base history value to determine whether the current base value is larger, equal, or smaller. May be. Since the base value is obtained by division, it is generally a decimal value. For this reason, it is preferable to determine whether the base history value is equal to the current base value in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

  63 to 67 are diagrams showing examples of the display selection table. These display selection tables are used to select the effects of the special symbol variation display game based on a random number selected in response to winning at the start winning opening (or before the start of the special symbol variation display game). The display selection table 1 shown in FIGS. 63 to 65 is selected when the base value is increasing or when the base value is not changed, and the display selection tables 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 66 and 67 are selected while the base value is decreasing. Selected. In particular, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 67 is selected after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value began to decrease.

  Each display selection table includes items of production number, production content, variation time, remarks, and distribution. The effect number is an identifier for uniquely identifying the effect selected in the display selection table. The production content is the name of the production. The variation time is the time from the start to the end of the variation of the special symbol due to the effect. The remarks are information describing the outline of the production so that the designer can understand it. The distribution is a probability that the production is selected, and is defined by a numerator with 65536 as a denominator.

  63 is selected when the result of the big hit lottery is out of order and the base value is increasing or has not changed, the display selection table 1 shown in FIG. 64 (1 per hit). Is selected when the result of the big hit lottery is a normal big hit that does not lead to a probability variation state, and the base value is rising or there is no change. The display selection table 1 (2 per hit) shown in FIG. 65 is selected when the result of the big hit lottery is a probable big hit that derives a probable change state and the base value is rising or not changed.

  The display selection table 2 shown in FIG. 66 is selected while the base value is decreasing. In addition, the display selection table 3 illustrated in FIG. 67 is selected when the base value is decreased even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value began to decrease.

  As shown in the figure, the display selection tables 2 and 3 include freeze effects 1 and 2 which are effects in which the symbols do not vary, and the freeze effect is selected with high probability. The freeze effect is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the effect is determined.

  Further, if the base value is reduced even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value began to decrease, an effect is selected using the display selection table 3, and the selected effect is obtained. You may switch.

  In addition, whether to display a specific effect informing the change in the base value may be determined according to the gaming state (gaming situation). This is because if the change of the base value is always notified to the player, the player's attention to the effect of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original pleasure of the pachinko machine, may be unclear, and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. Because there is.

  For example, during the execution of a special symbol variation display game (game situation in which the result of the jackpot lottery is not shown), the special symbol variation display game is preferentially executed. It is preferable to display a specific effect (effect that serves as an indication of a change in the base value) at the time or at the time of descent.

  The specific effect may be displayed at a timing when the special symbol variation display game is not executed for a predetermined time. In this case, if the specific effect is displayed immediately after the special symbol variation display game is over, the player's feeling of tension persists and fatigue is accumulated. When a game ball wins the start winning opening in a state where the specific effect is displayed, the display of the specific effect is stopped and the effect of the special symbol variation display game is executed. This is because it is better to let the player pay attention to the special symbol variation display game because the big winning lottery is performed and the special symbol variation display game is started with the winning at the start winning opening.

  The specific effect may be displayed even in a situation where the number of prize balls has not reached a predetermined number (threshold Th1) or a situation in which the number of out balls has not reached a predetermined number (threshold Th2). Further, the specific effect may be displayed according to the result of the lottery, but may be always executed if the same condition is satisfied.

  In addition, the specific effect is not displayed when the base value increases, but may be displayed only when the base value decreases. This is because if the player is informed of an increase in the base value, the player's expectation increases, and if the base value does not increase to the extent expected by the player, the player may be discouraged due to a gap with the expectation. is there. On the other hand, if the player is informed of the decrease in the base value, there are players who increase the fighting spirit to increase the base value.

  In this embodiment, the display selection table is changed while the base value is decreasing and when the base value is decreasing (rising, steady), but the display is divided into three states: the base value is decreasing, steady, and rising. A selection table may be defined to notify the player that the base is rising. In this case, it is preferable to determine whether the base value is in a steady state (whether the base history value is equal to the current base value) in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

  Further, the specific effect may be displayed during the special symbol variation display game. In this case, there is a higher possibility that the base value will be lower when the special symbol variation display game is displayed than when the special symbol variation display game is displayed.

  Note that the base value usually decreases in a state where the game ball does not win the start winning opening and the special symbol variation display game is not performed. If the special symbol variation display game is not played for a predetermined time, a demonstration screen is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 68A shows a display example of normal reach, where the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. FIG. 68B is a display example of special reach 1, in which the left symbol and the right symbol displayed at the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are fighting against each other, and the middle symbol is determined by the result of the Janken. FIG. 68C shows a display example of special reach 2, in which the left symbol and the right symbol displayed at the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are competing, and the middle symbol is determined by the result of the battle.

  FIG. 68 (D) is a display example of freeze effect 1, in which the stopped decorative symbol is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value decreases at a position that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative symbol (for example, the lower right corner of the screen). The display is recognizable. FIG. 68E is a display example of freeze effect 2, in which the stopped decorative symbol is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value decreases at a position that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative symbol (for example, at the bottom of the screen). Display that can recognize continuation. In the freeze effect, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be an arbitrary position as long as it does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative symbol. Further, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative design. For example, a display that pops up in the center of the display screen may be used.

  Although the example in which the degree of change of the base value is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 has been described above, the lighting mode of the decorative lamp may be changed. Further, the change in the base value may be displayed as a numerical value instead of the upward or downward tendency of the base value.

  The change in the displayed base value is the total cumulative value of the base value calculated before the predetermined time, even if the base value calculated during the time interval before the predetermined time is compared with the base value calculated during the current time interval. It may be a result of comparison between the total cumulative total of the latest base values.

[9-8. Calculation based on a specific general winning slot]
Next, a process for accurately calculating the base value in consideration of winning in a specific general winning opening will be described.

  In the pachinko machine, the player aims to win a particular winning opening (for example, the winning opening 2005, 2006 that has been opened) in which the game ball is easy to win during the jackpot. Adjust the firing strength. Even during big hits, games that aim at the big prize opening 2005 by launching a game ball aiming at the same place as the so-called normal hit, or aiming at the big prize winner 2006 by so-called right hit with the maximum strength of the launch. There are variations. In such a variation, a game board may be designed so that a start winning opening and a general winning opening are arranged downstream of the big winning opening, and a ball spilled from the large winning opening is picked up.

  Here, the downstream (lower part) in the pachinko machine to be hit right during the big hit will be described in detail. During the big hit, the player makes a right turn in order to win the game ball in the open big opening. Many of the game balls launched toward the game area win the open big prize opening 2006. As described above, the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment is provided with the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the big winning opening 2005 as shown in FIGS. 10 and 16, and the right-handed game ball is open. When the grand prize opening 2006 is not won, the general prize opening 2001 is won. That is, it can be said that the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the big winning opening 2005 wins only when the right-handed game ball does not win the open big winning opening 2006.

  The base value is the number of prize balls that are paid out by winning the start prize opening and the general prize opening when 100 game balls are launched toward the game area 5a (ie, for 100 out balls). The ratio of the number of prize balls that have been paid out) is a launch ball that has entered the game area but is unlikely to win the start and general prize openings (highly likely to win the big prize opening) When counting to the number (the number of out balls), it is assumed that when calculated as the base value, it deviates from the actual base value.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the big winning opening 2005 is defined as a specific general winning opening, and the number of balls won in the specific general winning opening during the special prize is excluded from the number of out balls. To calculate the base value.

The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation of the gaming machine that calculates the base value in consideration of a specific general winning opening is as follows.
FIG. 69 and FIG. 39: Base value is calculated every time the timer interruption period. FIG. 70 and FIG. 71: Base value is calculated for each predetermined number of winning balls and every predetermined number of out balls. The description of the pattern for calculating the base value and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out-balls is omitted, but can be realized by combining FIGS.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation region update processing (step S81). 69. The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 69 calculates the base value using the number of out balls corrected by the number of winning balls to a specific general winning slot at each timer interruption period. Get the number of balls and the number of specific winning balls. In FIG. 69, the same step number is assigned to the same part as the above-described base calculation area update process, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810), the number of prize balls in the special prize is obtained (step S811), and the obtained number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 69, every time the number of winning balls is calculated, the total number of winning balls used for the base calculation is updated. Note that it is determined whether there is a prize ball. If there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total prize ball number may be skipped.

  Thereafter, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls (specific winning ball number) to a specific general winning opening is acquired (step S820). Then, a value obtained by subtracting the number of specific winning balls from the number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 69, every time an out ball or a winning ball is detected, the total number of out balls used for base calculation is updated.

  Note that, as in steps S815 to S817 of the above-described base calculation area update process (FIG. 45), it is determined whether there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of winning balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 in FIG. 45, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired. When the prize ball abnormality notification timer expires, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated, The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

  After recording the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area updating process shown in FIG. 69, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation / display process shown in FIG.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update processing (step S81). In the base calculation area update processing shown in FIG. 70, in order to calculate the base value at a timing when the number of winning balls and the number of out balls satisfy a predetermined condition, the number of winning balls is recorded in the winning ball number buffer, Record the number in the out ball buffer. In FIG. 70, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the base calculation area updating process described above, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether the gaming state is a special prize (step S810), the number of prize balls in the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether there is a prize ball (step S812). If there is a prize ball, the obtained prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls (step S815). If there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

  Thereafter, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired, it is determined whether the winning opening relating to the acquired number of winning balls is a specific general winning opening, and the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening is acquired (step S820). Then, the acquired number of winning balls for the specific general winning opening is added to the specific winning ball number buffer (step S823).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer has expired (step S824). When the prize ball abnormality notification timer expires, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped ( Step S825).

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 71, the base value is calculated in consideration of the specific number of winning balls recorded in the specific winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 71, the same steps as those in the base calculation / display process described above are denoted by the same step numbers, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the winning ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not time to update the total winning ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or greater than the threshold Th1, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out ball number buffer value is added to the total out ball number (step S893), and the out ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). Note that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or every predetermined time without comparing the winning ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the sum of the number of out-passage balls stored in the out-ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning-ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). ). The sum of the number of balls passing through the outlet and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area, which is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated number of out balls is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the time to update the total number of out balls, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated number of out balls is greater than or equal to the threshold Th2, the prize ball number buffer value is added to the total prize ball number (step S897), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the specific number of winning balls is subtracted from the total number of out balls and the threshold value Th2 is added (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

  Then, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, and the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by the total number of out balls (step S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, a case where the calculated base value is larger or smaller than a design value (normal value) exceeding a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that a plurality of stages of tolerances may be provided, and the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages depending on the degree of deviation of the base value. If the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908) to notify the player or hall employee of the base. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display process is terminated.

  In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 71, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of winning balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, the base value remains the same, and if the total number of winning balls or the total number of out balls is updated, The base value is updated to a different value. Note that the base value may be calculated at a timing when one of the total number of winning balls or the total number of out balls is updated, or the base value may be calculated at a timing when both are updated.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated by excluding the game balls that have flowed into the game area but are unlikely to win the start opening and the general winning opening, so there is a difference from the actual base value. A small base value can be calculated accurately.

  Further, a case has been described in which a pachinko machine that makes a right hit during a big hit and a general winning opening 2001 is located downstream of the big winning opening 2006, but the invention according to the present embodiment aims at the big winning opening 2005 during a normal hit. Even a pachinko machine can be applied to a gaming machine in which a start opening or a general winning opening is arranged downstream of the big winning opening 2005.

  In the game area 5a, game winning balls 2005 and 2006 are arranged, which normally do not accept game balls, but can accept game balls in accordance with the jackpot lottery result. You may exclude from the calculation of a base value the prize ball by winning to this big winning opening 2005, 2006. In this case, the game ball wins the start winning opening 2002, 2004 and the special symbol variation display game starts, and from the time the special symbol is confirmed until the big winning opening 2005, 2006 is released (a big hit opening), the big win The detected out ball is excluded from the number of out balls as a special prize is given during the period from when the mouths 2005 and 2006 are closed until the next special symbol variation display game is started (a jackpot ending). In this way, it is possible to count the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the special prize without determining whether or not the special prize is being given in step S810 in FIG. In the case where the big prize opening 2005, 2006 repeats opening and closing with one jackpot, the time between the closing of the big prize opening 2005, 2006 and the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize.

  In addition, in the game area 5a, a second start port 2004 that normally does not accept a game ball but can accept a game ball according to a lottery result of a normal symbol is arranged. You may exclude from the calculation of a base value the prize ball by the winning to this 2nd starting port 2004. In this case, a game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and a normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal symbol variation display game is started, and after the normal symbol is confirmed until it is released (opening), the second starting port 2004 is started. During the period until the next normal symbol variation display game is started (ending) after closing, the out ball detected is excluded from the number of out balls. When the second starting port 2004 repeats opening and closing according to the normal symbol lottery result, the time between the closing of the second starting port 2004 and the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize. In this way, all winnings for the second starting port 2004 can be excluded from the calculation of the base value in addition to the time saving.

  As described above, it is possible to accurately count the number of award balls and the number of out-balls other than during a special prize (big hit, short time, etc.) without determining whether or not a special prize is being received in step S810 in FIG.

  In this way, the base value can be accurately calculated by accurately excluding the number of out balls and the number of prize balls while the player is making a right strike.

  In addition, depending on the pachinko machine, it is recommended to play a left-handed game in a state that is neither big hit nor short-time (so-called normal state), and to play a right-handed game during a big hit or short-time. In such a gaming machine, a general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002 for winning when left-handed, a general winning port 2001, and a second starting port 2004 for winning when right-handed are provided. In such a gaming machine, the number of winning holes in the center from the left side of the game area 5a (area where the game ball rolls when left-handed) and the right side of the game area 5a (area where the game ball rolls when right-handed) Depending on the arrangement and the position of the nail, the winning rate for each winning opening differs. In other words, the base value for left-handed and the base value for right-handed are different.

  The base value of the pachinko machine is set on the assumption that the player makes a left strike in the normal state. However, as described above, when the base value differs between left-handed and right-handed (for example, when the right-handed base value in the normal state is designed to be lower than left-handed) If the player hits right in the normal state, a low base value is calculated.

  Hall considers that pachinko machines with a low base value are abnormal and checks them, or judges that they are gaming machines with poor performance. Even in a pachinko machine that has been judged to have poor ball performance (lower than the assumed base), the hole judges that the player is making a left-handed, so the starting prize opening that acts on the base when left-handed And make adjustments to increase the entrance rate of the general winning opening. Then, the nail having the abnormality is adjusted to increase the base value. If left-handed with the gaming machine adjusted in this way, many prize balls can be obtained even in the normal state. In other words, many lotteries can be received for a small amount. In other words, even if the left-handed base is not different from the one assumed by the hole, the hole is misunderstood and adjustments are made to increase the entrance rate of the starting opening and the general winning opening for winning when left-handed. Since the hole may be disadvantaged by such bad intention of the player, it is necessary to accurately calculate the base value for left-handed and the base value for right-handed.

  By the way, the pachinko machine that makes a right turn in a short time, the second start opening 2004 that opens and closes according to the gaming state, and the gate part 2003 for performing the normal symbol lottery for opening the second start opening 2004 are It is arranged in the area where the game ball rolls. In addition, when a game ball passes right through the gate portion 2003 in the normal state, even if the normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal winning probability is made extremely low so that the second starting port 2004 is not opened. Even if the symbol lottery is won, the opening time of the second start port 2004 is shortened, and it is difficult to win the second start port 2004 in the normal state.

  Here, in order to increase the base value in the right-handed state in the normal state, the entrance rate to the second starting port 2004 is increased. However, since the second start port 2004 is generally set to be more advantageous than the first start port 2002, increasing the ball entry rate into the second start port 2004 presses the profit of the hall. Therefore, when the base ball is calculated by counting the number of game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003 in the normal state, it is preferable to calculate the corrected base value using the number of passing balls of the gate unit 2003.

  Specifically, the number of game balls that have passed through the gate portion 2003 in the normal state is subtracted from the number of out balls (the number of game balls that have been struck toward the game area 5a) as the number of specific winning balls. By reducing the number of out balls, a high base calculation value can be obtained. For example, when a considerable number of game balls pass through the gate part 2003, an extremely high base value is calculated. Note that the degree of the correction process may be appropriately determined based on the design value (performance) of the gaming machine.

  Furthermore, the passage of the gate part 2003 is monitored, and when a game ball passes the gate part 2003 (a case where a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls pass the gate part 2003 without winning the starting opening, etc. The number of out balls counted at a predetermined time or a predetermined number of shots after passing through the gate part 2003 (or before and after) may not be used for calculation of the base value. In this way, the base value can be calculated more accurately. When the passage of the gate unit 2003 is detected, a display or sound such as “Please return to the left” may be output without actively notifying the player that the result is not reflected in the base calculation result. Further, when the passage of the gate part 2003 is detected, the hall may be notified that the right hand is being made. For example, a specific lamp may be turned on, a lighting mode may be changed, or a right-handed beating may be output from an external terminal board to a hall computer installed in a game hall.

  As described above, by removing the number of passing balls of the gate portion 2003 provided on the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when right-handed) from the out-ball number, the right-hand strike in the normal state The hour base value can be corrected to a larger value. For this reason, the fluctuation | variation of the calculation value of a base by a player's game style can be prevented.

[10. Slot machine]
The arrangement of the program and data stored in the ROM of the pachinko machine has been described so far. Next, the arrangement of the program and data stored in the RAM and ROM of the slot machine (cylinder-type game machine) will be described. The outline of the pachinko machine has been described with reference to FIG. 25, but programs and data are arranged in the RAM and ROM as in the case of the slot machine 4000 described below.

[10-1. Construction]
First, the structure of the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment will be described. 72 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000, and FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000 with the front member 4200 opened.

  As shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the slot machine 4000 of the present embodiment includes various devices provided in a box-shaped housing 4100 whose front surface is open, and a front member on the front surface of the housing 4100. 4200 is provided to be openable and closable in a single-opening manner. An upper part of the front member 4200 is provided with an image display body 4500 for performing presentation and information display according to the progress of the game, and a speaker for performing presentation with sound. The image display body 4500 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display panel, and displays various information in addition to the effect display related to the game. Then, various effect displays and history information display on the image display body 4500 are controlled by the effect control board 4700. That is, the image display body 4500 constitutes an effect display means capable of displaying an effect according to the progress of the game, and the effect control board 4700 serves as a display control means capable of performing display control of the effect display means. Eggplant.

  A front panel on which a decorative pattern or the like is drawn is arranged at the center of the front member 4200 so that the rear cannot be seen, and the rear is visible at the center of the front panel (for example, transparent ) A symbol display window 4401 is formed. Note that the front panel may be configured by a display device, and the reel 4301 is visible when no image is displayed on the symbol display window 4401, and an image that produces a game is mainly displayed around the symbol display window 4401. To do. In this case, an image for producing a game can be displayed on the symbol display window 4401.

  Through the symbol display window 4401 (window portion), a symbol variably displayed by the rotation of the reel 4301 provided in the housing can be visually recognized. The reel 4301 includes a cylindrical left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. A plurality of symbols are arranged in accordance with a predetermined arrangement by winding a strip-shaped sheet on which a plurality of symbols are drawn along the longitudinal direction on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c.

  Each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is provided with a reel drive motor 4341a, 4341b, 4341c (see FIG. 74), which is a stepping motor, and each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is independently rotated and stopped. It is possible to do. That is, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c serve as drive sources for the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c. Further, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c increase the drive torque and the static torque by being controlled by the two-phase excitation method, similarly to the payout motor 839 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above. As a result, a small motor can be employed as the drive source, and the cost can be reduced.

  Hereinafter, the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are referred to as a left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, and 4211c are referred to as a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c. Further, the reel drive motor 4341 corresponding to each reel is a left reel drive motor 4341a, a middle reel drive motor 4341b, and a right reel drive motor 4341c.

  Further, by rotating the reel 4301 by the reel drive motor 4341, a plurality of kinds of symbols visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401 are varied so as to circulate from top to bottom, for example (variable display). On the other hand, in a state where the reel 4301 is stopped, a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols, that is, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3, are displayed through the symbol display window 4401 for each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. And is visible. That is, through the symbol display window 4401, the effective display portions of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c for deriving and displaying the game stop result can be visually recognized.

  For a 3 × 3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401, a predetermined enabling line is set. In the present embodiment, a line crossing the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c diagonally across the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c (middle line), and a line crossing the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c diagonally from the lower reel 4301a to the middle reel 4301b. A line (lower right line) that obliquely crosses each of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c from the upper stage of the left reel 4301a to the lower stage of the middle reel 4301c is a line that can be activated. Then, the validable line is activated by the player's insertion of medals or input from credits (hereinafter referred to as “betting operation”), and based on the symbol combination mode (outcome) formed on this effective line. It is determined whether or not a winning (role) has been established.

  When winning is established, there are cases where three predetermined symbols are arranged on another line in addition to the case where three predetermined symbols are arranged on the effective line. As such a line, there is a line (upper line) crossing the upper symbols of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. It should be noted that a line crossing the lower symbols of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c (lower line) and a front portion (visible portion) facing the symbol display window 4401 of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c other than the above are crossed. It is also possible to arrange the appearance symbols on the virtual lines that are positioned. Below, the lines that can be activated (middle, right-up, and right-down lines), the lines that can be arranged in the appearance when winning the prize (upper line), and other lines (lower line, etc.) are grouped together. Line).

  The upper, middle, lower, right-up and right-down lines are enabled, and a predetermined enable line is enabled according to the number of bets, and a prize is awarded based on the symbol combination form formed on the active line ( Judgment / non-establishment of the role). For example, in the case of 1 bet, the middle line is the effective line, in the case of 2 bets, the upper and lower lines are active lines in addition to the middle line, and in the case of 3 bets, the upper right, lower and lower lines are valid lines. And Also, regardless of the bet number (even if the bet number is 1 or 2), all the lines may be valid, or three lines may be dedicated.

  A payout number display LED 4562 for displaying the number of medals to be paid out by the game is provided around the symbol display window 4401 (for example, below). A credit indicator for displaying the number of medals stored in the slot machine 4000 and a count indicator for displaying the number of remaining games in the special prize may be provided.

  A stepped portion protruding forward is formed below the symbol display window 4401, and an upper surface of the stepped portion is an operation portion 4202 that is inclined downward on the front side. The operation section 4202 is provided with a medal insertion slot 4203, a one-sheet insertion button 4205 and a max bet button 4206 as a progress operation section for advancing the game.

  The medal slot 4203 is disposed on the right side when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000 in the operation unit 4202. When the player inserts medals into the medal slot 4203 and performs a betting operation, the game can be executed. A path through which medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 pass is provided with an insertion sensor 4207b for detecting the passage of medals, and the number of inserted medals is counted based on detection information by the insertion sensor 4207b.

  The one-sheet insertion button 4205 and the max bet button 4206 are arranged on the left side when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000 in the operation unit 4202. The single sheet input button 4205 can be input one by one from the credit by performing a pressing operation once. The maximum bet button 4206 can be input from credit to the upper limit number of bets (for example, three) by performing a pressing operation once. However, when the credit number is less than the upper limit number, the credit number is input as the bet number. It is like that.

  A payout button 4209, a start lever 4210, a return button 4208, a reel stop button 4211, a key device 4215, and the like are provided below the operation unit 4202. The payout button 4209 is paid out when a medal inserted through the medal insertion slot 4203, a single coin insertion button 4205, a medal (bet medal) input as a bet amount by the max bet button 4206, or a winning is established and stored as a credit. This is used when giving a command to return the medals (stored medals) to the medal tray 4201. It should be noted that medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 4203 after an automatic betting operation based on the establishment of a re-game winning (replay winning), or more than a predetermined number of medals that can be stored as credits are used for medal through the medal selector 4207. It is returned to the tray 4201.

  The start lever 4210 is an operation lever for starting a single game. The key device 4215 is for inserting a key when opening the front member 4200 or resetting an error (for example, hopper error) state of the slot machine 4000. A return button 4208 is used when a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and jammed inside the medal selector 4207 is returned to the medal tray 4201.

  The reel stop button 4211 includes a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c that are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c. In response to the stop operation, the rotation of the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is stopped.

  In addition, a decorative plate (decorative panel) that constitutes a lower region of the front member 4200 is provided below a portion where these operation buttons are provided. Further, below the decorative plate and at the bottom of the front member 4200, a medal tray 4201 for storing medals, a medal payout opening, a speaker 4512 for outputting sound, and the like are provided.

  A main board (game control device) 4600 (see FIG. 74) for controlling the entire slot machine 4000 is disposed in the upper part inside the housing. An accessory ratio display 1317 and an accessory ratio display switch 1318 are provided on the main board 4600. The accessory ratio display 1317 is configured by, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, similarly to the pachinko machine described above. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device provided on the main substrate 4600.

  The accessory ratio display 1317 is not provided on the main board 4600, but is also used as another display (for example, the payout number display LED 4562 or the image display body 4500) provided in front of the slot machine 4000, and the payout number display LED 4562. Alternatively, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the image display body 4500.

  When the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. It may be displayed (printing, engraving, sticker, etc.) that the switch is for operating the display of the accessory ratio on the printed circuit board in the vicinity of the accessory ratio display switch 1318 or on the housing 4100. Note that the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is preferably provided in the vicinity of the accessory ratio indicator 1317. However, even if it is not the main control unit 1300, any other board (for example, production) The control board 4700, the power supply device 4112), the housing 4100, and the front member 4200 may be provided. Further, as will be described later, the accessory ratio display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the accessory ratio display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate, it is possible to prevent the player from operating it erroneously.

  In addition, a symbol variation display device 4300 is provided almost in the center of the housing, and rotatable reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are placed thereon. In addition, an external relay terminal plate 4131 for outputting a signal from the main board 4600 to an external device is provided inside the casing of the slot machine 4000.

  Further, a medal payout device (hopper) 4110 is disposed at the lower part inside the housing. The medal payout device 4110 receives and stores medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and guided by the medal selector 4207, and when a predetermined symbol combination form is formed on the active line and a winning is established, Medals (payout medals) corresponding to the number of medals or medals that exceed the upper limit of credits due to the addition associated with the winning of a prize are paid out to the medal tray 4201. The medal for the credit is paid out to the medal tray 4201 by the medal payout device 4110 by operating the payout button 4209. Further, on the right side of the medal payout device 4110, the medal that overflows and flows in from the medal payout device 4110 is stored, or the received medal is sent to the medal collection mechanism on the installation island where the slot machine 4000 is installed. An overflow tank for guiding is provided.

[10-2. Slot machine internal configuration]
FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing configurations of various mechanism elements, electronic devices, operation members, and the like provided in the slot machine 4000. The slot machine 4000 has a main board 4600 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game. A CPU 4601, a ROM 4602, a RAM 4603, an input / output interface 4604, and the like are mounted on the main board 4600.

  As described above, the main board 4600 is provided with the accessory ratio display 1317 for displaying the accessory ratio calculated by the CPU 4601 and the accessory ratio display switch 1318 for switching the display of the accessory ratio display 1317. The accessory ratio display switch 1318 may be a push button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be another type of switch. When the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317.

  The one-sheet insertion button 4205, the max bet button 4206, the start lever 4210, the reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c, the payout button 4209, etc. are all connected to the main board 4600, and these operation buttons are not shown in the drawing. Is operated by the player, and the detected operation signal is output to the main board 4600. Specifically, when the start lever 4210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-described symbol variation display device 4300 (starting rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c) is output to the main board 4600, and the reel stop button 4211a. , 4211b, 4211c are operated, an operation signal for stopping the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is output to the main board 4600.

  In addition, the slot machine 4000 accommodates other devices together with the main substrate 4600, and various signals are input to the main substrate 4600 from these devices. In addition to the symbol variation display device 4300, the devices include a medal payout device 4110 and the like.

  As described above, the symbol variation display device 4300 includes reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c for rotating the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c, respectively (left reel drive motor 4341a, middle reel drive motor 4341b, right reel Reel drive motor 4341c). The reel drive motor 4341 is a stepping motor, and each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c can be rotated and stopped independently. At the time of the rotation, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed on the symbol display window 4401. Displayed continuously changing downward.

  The reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c have position sensors 4331a, 4331b, and 4331c for detecting reference positions related to rotation. The reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c have position sensors 4331a, 4331b, and 4331c, respectively. The reels are provided correspondingly (left reel position sensor 4331a, middle reel position sensor 4331b, right reel position sensor 4331c). When detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors are input to the main board 4600, the main board 4600 can obtain stop position information of each reel.

  In the medal selector 4207, the solenoid 4207a and the insertion sensor 4207b described above are installed. The insertion sensor 4207b detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203, and outputs a medal detection signal to the main board 4600. When the solenoid 4207a is in an OFF state, the inserted medal is detected by the insertion sensor 4207b. Conversely, when the solenoid 4207a is in the ON state, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 4207b in the medal selector 4207 is locked out so that the insertion of medals is not accepted, and even if the player inserts medals, the medal selector 4207 The medal that has flowed through the return basket to the medal returns to the medal tray 4201. At the same time, the function of the insertion sensor 4207b is invalidated, so that neither betting by medal insertion nor medal storage is performed.

  The medal payout device 4110 has a payout sensor 4110e for detecting the payout medal one by one in the discharge port, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 4600 from the payout sensor 4110e. . The auxiliary storage box for game medals is provided with a medal full sensor 4111a. When the number of medals stored inside exceeds a predetermined number, a detection signal indicating that the number of medals exceeds a predetermined number is sent to the main board 4600. Output to. At this time, an error display for notifying abnormality of medal storage is performed by the image display body 4500, the error lamp 4554, and the like, and it is notified to the player, the hall employee, and the like that the abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 4600 to the symbol variation display device 4300 and the medal payout device 4110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c described above is output from the main board 4600. The medal payout device 4110 receives a drive signal from the main board 4600 according to the combination of symbols stopped on the active line, and in response to this, the medal payout device 4110 performs a medal payout operation. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal payout device 4110 or there is no medal at all, the number detection by the payout sensor 4110e is delayed. When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the payout sensor 4110e outputs a payout medal abnormality signal to the main board 4600. In response to this, the main board 4600 notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the medal payout. Is displayed on the error lamp 4554, the image display 4500, or the like to notify the player or hall employee that an abnormality has occurred.

  The slot machine 4000 includes an effect control board 4700 in addition to the main board 4600. The effect control board 4700 includes a CPU 4701, ROM 4702, RAM 4703, input / output interface 4707, VDP (Video Display Processor) 4704, AMP (audio amplifier). 4705, a sound source IC 4706, etc. are mounted. The effect control board 4700 receives various command signals from the main board 4600 and controls the display of the image display body 4500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the lighting device 4502, and the operation of the speaker 4512.

  Further, an external relay terminal plate 4131 is provided, and the slot machine 4000 is connected to the hall computer 4800 in the game hall through the external relay terminal plate 4131. The external relay terminal board 4131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 4600 to the hall computer 4800.

  The power supply device 4112 creates a plurality of types of DC power supplies from AC 24 volt (AC24V) power supplied from the island facility. For example, three types of power sources of DC +5 V (hereinafter “+5 V”), DC +12 V (hereinafter “+12 V”), and DC +24 V (hereinafter “+24 V”) are created. Three types of power supplies of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply device 4112 are supplied to each component included in the slot machine 4000. For example, two types of power supplies of + 5V and + 12V are supplied to the reel 4301 and the reel drive motor 4341. Is supplied to the symbol fluctuation display device 4300.

  In addition, the power supply device 4112 includes a setting change key switch 4112t, a reset switch 4112u, a power switch 4112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 4000, and can be operated only when the front member 4200 is opened. The power switch 4112v is for turning on / off the power supply to the slot machine 4000, and the setting change key switch 4112t is for changing settings (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 4000. The reset switch 4112u is for canceling an error that has occurred in the slot machine 4000, and is also operated when changing the setting together with the setting change key switch 4112t.

  The main board 4600 is provided with a reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. In the case where the output torque of the reel drive motor 4341 is rotationally driven to obtain a drive torque for rotating the reel 4301, the CPU 4601 sets the logic (for example, HI) of the voltage switch signal to set the reel drive motor voltage switch circuit 4605. Is output to the reel drive motor 4341 as a motor drive voltage. On the other hand, when obtaining the static torque for maintaining the state where the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 is stopped, the CPU 4601 sets the logic of the voltage switch signal (for example, LOW) and sets the reel drive motor voltage switch circuit 4605. Is output to the reel drive motor 4341 as a motor drive voltage.

  The above is an example of the configuration of the slot machine 4000. In the game by the slot machine 4000, when the player operates the start lever 4210 in a state where the number of medals is determined, the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c rotate, and then the player turns the reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c. Is operated, the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are controlled to stop, and when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination of symbols on the effective line, and necessary. Accordingly, a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is awarded.

  As described above, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is provided with a reel band on which a symbol is drawn. Then, when all reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c are stopped, the display content displayed in the symbol display window 4401 (the combination of symbols displayed on the active line) of the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. It is determined whether or not a combination mode (design combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a symbol combination mode corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned active line in the symbol display window 4401. It is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on each of the plurality of active lines. As a result, when it is determined that a plurality of symbol combinations of winning combinations are displayed, medals of a quantity that is the sum of the number of payouts corresponding to each displayed winning combination are paid out.

[10-3. Storage area configuration]
Next, a storage area provided by the ROM 4602 and the RAM 4603 provided on the main board 4600 will be described. The storage area of the pachinko machine has been described with reference to FIG. 23, but has the same configuration as that of the slot machine 4000 shown in FIGS. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing details of an access area in game control of the slot machine 4000 and a ROM area 5100 that is a storage area corresponding to the ROM 4602 in the present embodiment.

  The storage area in this embodiment is provided by a medium such as the ROM 4602 and the RAM 4603, and is provided as one access area to which addresses from “0000H” to “FFFFH” are assigned. Further, the access area of this embodiment is divided into predetermined areas corresponding to the medium that provides the access area, and includes a ROM area 5100, a RAM area 5200, an I / O area 5300, and a parameter information setting area 5400. It is. Note that each area does not necessarily correspond to a medium that provides an access area, and one area may be provided by a plurality of media, or a plurality of areas may be provided by one medium.

  By configuring the access area of the present embodiment as described above, the CPU 4601 can access programs and data without being aware of the medium that actually provides the access area by designating the address. Details of the access area will be described below.

[10-3-1. ROM area]
First, the configuration of the ROM area 5100 will be described. The ROM area 5100 corresponds to the storage area provided by the ROM 4602. The ROM 4602 is a non-volatile storage medium that retains stored contents even when the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. The stored data can be read, but updated or deleted. I can't do that. Note that the ROM 4602 may be a non-volatile storage medium, and the data stored in the ROM area 5100 may be updatable.

  The ROM area 5100 is assigned addresses from “0000H” to “1FFFH”. The CPU 4601 can access data stored in the ROM 4602 by designating an address “0000H” to “1FFFH”.

  The ROM area 5100 includes a first control area, a first isolation area, a first data area, a second control area, a second isolation area, a second data area, a third control area, a third isolation area, and a fourth isolation area. included. In each area, a start address and an end address are set.

  The first control area is a game control area, and stores a program for performing game control. The first data area is a game data area in which data necessary for performing game control is stored. That is, the game stored in the first control area is executed, and the game control is performed while referring to the data stored in the first data area. The areas used for game control (first control area, first data area) are used as game control areas (first storage areas).

  The second control area stores a program for debugging the control program (functional inspection). The second data area is an area for storing data for debugging (functional inspection). Note that the second data area is not necessarily required, and debugging data may be stored in the second control area. It should be noted that an area (second control area, second data area) for storing a program or data for debugging (functional inspection) of a game control program without being used for game control is an area for debugging (inspection function) ( Second storage area).

  The third control area stores a program for calculating and displaying an accessory ratio. In the third control area, data for calculating an accessory ratio is also stored. You may provide the 3rd data area which stores the data for calculation of an accessory ratio. Note that an area (third control area) in which a program and data for calculating an accessory ratio without being used for game control are stored is an accessory ratio calculation area (third storage area). In this way, the character ratio calculation / display code 13135 is designed separately from the game control code 13131 and stored in a separate area, thereby checking the character ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the game control code 13131. The inspection of the slot machine 4000 can be reduced. Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 can be commonly used by a plurality of models without depending on the model.

  The first isolation area, the second isolation area, the third isolation area, and the fourth isolation area are areas allocated between the control area and the data area, and are areas where access is prohibited. In the process by the CPU 4601, when the isolated area is accessed, the reset process is forcibly executed. The first isolation area, the second isolation area, the third isolation area, and the fourth isolation area are areas that are continuous with the preceding and following areas.For example, the start address of the first isolation area is next to the end address of the first control area. Address (“0A00H”), and the end address of the first isolated area is the previous address (“0AFFH”) of the first data area. The third isolation area is arranged between the game control area and the debug (function inspection) area. In FIG. 29, the third isolation area is handled as the game control area. You may make it treat as. Similarly, the fourth isolation region is arranged between the debugging (function inspection) region and the accessory ratio calculation region. In FIG. 75, the fourth isolation region is treated as a debugging (function inspection) region. It may be handled as an object ratio calculation area.

[10-3-2. RAM area]
Next, the configuration of the RAM area 5200 will be described. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing details of the RAM area 5200 in the present embodiment. The RAM area 5200 corresponds to a storage area provided by the RAM 4603. The RAM 4603 is a volatile storage medium whose stored contents are erased when the gaming machine 1 is turned off, and the stored data can be read and written. The RAM area 5200 temporarily stores programs and data stored in the ROM area 5100 and stores data derived by executing the programs. Note that the RAM 4603 only needs to be able to read and write data, and may be a nonvolatile storage medium. When a power failure occurs, the data stored in the RAM 4603 by the backup power source can be retained for a predetermined period.

  The RAM area 5200 is assigned addresses from “3000H” to “31FFH”. The CPU 4601 can access the data stored in the RAM 4603 by designating the address “3000H” to “31FFH”.

  The RAM area 5200 includes a game control work area, a debug (inspection function) work area, a save area, and an isolation area. In each area, a start address and an end address are set.

  The game control work area is a work area (temporary area) used when game control (first control) is executed. The work area for debugging (inspection function) is a work area used when program debug control (second control) is executed. The work ratio calculation work area is an area for storing data for calculating the accessory ratio and the calculated accessory ratio (such as an accessory ratio, a continuous accessory ratio, and an advantageous section accessory ratio). In addition, the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the ratio of an accessory need not necessarily have a dedicated work area, and may use a game control work area or a game control work area. A work area for debugging (inspection function) and a work area for calculating an accessory ratio may be allocated to the work area. In this case, the independence of the game control area, the debug (inspection function) control area, and the accessory ratio calculation work area decreases. However, if the program structure does not use the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work ratio calculation work area, the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for work ratio calculation need not be used. Also good.

  The evacuation area is an area for temporarily storing data for use in game control, debugging (inspection function) control, or for calculating an accessory ratio. For example, when an interrupt occurs and a predetermined process is executed, the values of various CPU registers (calculation registers, flag registers, stack pointers, etc.) are copied to the save area before the predetermined process is executed. The value copied after the process is completed is returned to the various registers of the CPU. The evacuation area may be used in common for game control, debugging (inspection function), and accessory ratio calculation, but, as with the work area, the game control, debugging (inspection function), and accessory ratio You may divide by calculation separately. Thereby, independence can be maintained more with game control, debug (inspection function) control, and an accessory ratio calculation.

  The isolation area includes a game control work area, a debug (inspection function) work area, and an accessory ratio calculation work area, a debug (inspection function) work area, an escape area, and an accessory ratio calculation save area. And are continuous with each area (front and back areas). For example, the start address of the isolation area between the game control work area and the debug (inspection function) work area is the address next to the end address of the game control work area ("3076H"), and the end address is This is the previous address (“307FH”) of the work area for debugging (inspection function). The isolated area is an area where access is prohibited, and is configured to forcibly execute the reset process when accessed in the process by the CPU 4601.

  FIG. 76 shows the details of the work area for calculating an accessory ratio on the right side. The work ratio calculation work area may include a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to a main area in which the calculation result of the accessory ratio is stored. . There may be one or more backup areas. A check code for detecting a data error is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the slot machine 4000 is turned on, or set every time the main area data is updated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, or the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 79). ) May be set. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined that the initialization process is normal or data is deleted, and the fixed value is set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 79). Good. The check code may also be used as a power interruption flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power interruption flag is set. If a predetermined value is set for the power interruption flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

  In the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 79), it is determined whether or not the data in the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be copied to the main area. Further, the value in the main area may be copied to each backup area in the power-off process executed when the power is shut down.

  Unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digits of the address.

  FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a specific structure of the work area for storing each data in the work ratio calculation work area.

  FIG. 77A shows the structure of the work area of the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 77 (A), the number of paid-out items, the number of consecutive paid-out items, the total number of paid-outs, the rate of bonuses, the rate of consecutive features, the number of advantageous zone games, the number of non-advantageous zone games and the advantageous zone Stores the percentage. The number of paid-out items is the number of medals to be paid out during the operation of the item (for example, during regular bonus). The number of consecutive combination winning balls is the number of medals to be paid out during continuous combination operation (for example, during a big bonus). The total number of payouts is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The ratio of items can be calculated by the number of items paid out divided by the total number of items paid out. The ratio of consecutive features can be calculated as the number of consecutive feature payouts divided by the total number of payouts. The number of advantageous section games is the number of games executed in a gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a gaming state in which medals on hand such as ART (assist replay time) are difficult to decrease), and the number of non-advantageous section games is The number of games executed in a gaming state other than the advantageous section. The advantageous section ratio can be calculated by the number of advantageous section games / (the number of advantageous section games + the number of non-advantageous section games).

  Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 77 (A), the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games and the number of non-advantageous section games are shown in FIG. 77 (B) described later. It corresponds to the total and is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. In addition, an accessory ratio, a continuous accessory ratio, and an advantageous section ratio are storage areas of 1 byte, and numerical values up to 255 in decimal can be stored.

  The number of feature payouts, the number of consecutive feature payouts, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are updated by the feature ratio calculation area update processing (step S1038 in FIG. 79). The consecutive character ratio and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the character ratio calculation / display process (step S1119 in FIG. 80).

  FIG. 77B shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 77 (B), the number of re-games, the number of winnings and payouts, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive bonuses paid out, the number of games, the rate of bonuses, the rate of consecutive bonuses, the number of advantageous section games, non The number of advantageous section games and the advantageous section ratio are stored. Each data storage area is constituted by a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of games (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games), and the number of games executed is predetermined. When the number reaches 400 (400 times), the write pointer for all data moves, and the storage area in which the data is updated changes. Then, after data of a predetermined number of games is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area.

  Note that the write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointer for all data moves for every predetermined number of prize balls. Also, the read pointer moves as the write pointer moves. The read pointer indicates a storage area that is delayed by one from the write pointer. This is for calculating the ratio of the objects using data for 400 games.

  The total of each data is the total value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the total value of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio is a value calculated from the total value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer goes around and is cleared to one storage area of the ring buffer in order to write new data, the accumulated value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past. The cumulative value of the ratio of consecutive items and the ratio of consecutive features is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Even if it is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer for writing new data, the total accumulated value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

  Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 77 (B), the number of re-games, the number of winnings and payouts, the number of winnings, the number of consecutive winnings and the number of games in the ring buffer are storage areas of 2 bytes each. Numerical values up to 65535 can be stored in decimal. The number of re-games, the number of winnings / payouts, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive bonuses paid out, and the total number of games are each a 3-byte storage area, and numerical values up to 16777215 in decimal can be stored. Since the total is, for example, a total of data for 400 games × n (6000 games when n = 15), a large storage area is prepared. The total number of replays, winnings / payouts, bonuses payouts, consecutive bonuses payouts, and total number of games is a 3- or 4-byte storage area, and numerical values up to 16777215 or 4294967295 can be stored in decimal numbers. Since the total total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that long-term data can be stored. In addition, the cumulative total and the total cumulative of the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio are each a 1-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal. The number of advantageous section games and the number of non-advantageous section games are each a 3-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 in decimal. The advantageous section ratio is a 1-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

  By increasing the number of games corresponding to the data stored in each storage area constituting the ring buffer (for example, 600 games), the number of continuous storage areas for storing time-series data ( Even if n) is reduced to 10, the same data for 6000 games can be stored. For this reason, the size of the storage area used as a ring buffer can be reduced.

  Of the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 77 (B), the number of items paid out, the number of consecutive items paid out, the item ratio, the number of consecutive items, the number of games in the advantageous section, the number of games in the non-advantageous section, and the ratio of advantageous sections are This is the same as the description in FIG. The number of replays is the number of replayed games. The winning / dispensing number is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The number of games is the number of games executed. When this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves.

  The number of replays, the number of winnings and payouts, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of consecutive bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the number of games in the advantageous zone and the number of games in the non-advantageous zone are updated in the bonus ratio calculation area update process (step S1038 in FIG. 79). ), And the accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S1119 in FIG. 80).

  In the data structure shown in FIG. 77 (A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data of the work area for calculating the ratio of the features is deleted in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 79). However, the data is not deleted at other times. For this reason, the data in the work area for calculating the ratio of an accessory may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the total accumulation in FIG. 77B may be deleted every predetermined period.

  In addition, the data of the work area for calculating the feature ratio and the calculated feature ratio are abnormal values (for example, the ratio of the accessory ratio exceeds 100%, and the calculation result of the accessory ratio has changed greatly from the previous calculated value. In this case, the abnormal value may be deleted. In addition to the abnormal value, all data in the work area for calculating the ratio of the features may be deleted. Moreover, when the data of the work area for calculating an accessory ratio or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that it is abnormal. In addition, the data in the backup area may be inspected using the check code, and after the normal backup area data is copied to the main area, the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[10-3-3. Configuration of I / O area]
Next, the I / O area 5300 will be described. The input / output ports correspond to the I / O area 5300, and the CPU 4601 can access each input / output port by accessing the I / O area 5300. The input / output port corresponds to, for example, a port related to an input such as a switch, or a port related to an output such as a big prize opening solenoid or an LED drive signal. The input / output port settings (settings relating to use / unuse such as input settings and output settings) are set based on the set values in the parameter information setting area 5400.

[10-3-4. Parameter information setting area]
Next, the parameter information setting area 5400 will be described. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing details of the parameter information setting area 5400 of the present embodiment. The parameter information setting area 5400 is an area in which various settings can be made. For example, as shown in FIG. 78, various settings include the start / end addresses of each control area and data area. In FIG. 78, illustration of the definition of the start address and end address of each area of the third control area, the accessory ratio calculation work area, and the accessory ratio calculation save area is omitted, but the third control area start setting is omitted. And the third control area end setting are defined in the same manner as the start and end settings of the other control areas, and the work area start setting for the accessory ratio calculation and the work area end setting for the accessory ratio calculation are the start and end of the other work areas. The saving ratio start setting for the accessory ratio calculation and the saving area end setting for the calculation of the accessory ratio are defined in the same manner as the start and end settings of the other saving areas. An area other than the area set here is an unused (unset) area. Thus, when the CPU 4601 accesses an unused area, a reset signal is forcibly input to the CPU 4601. 78 is set to a continuous area, it is not necessary that the setting area is continuous. For example, parameters may be grouped and arranged at a predetermined interval.

  In this embodiment, when an area other than the setting area (the first to fourth isolation areas of the ROM 5100 and the isolation area of the RAM 5200) is accessed, a reset is forcibly generated. Therefore, it is possible to perform the initial activation of the program when a reset occurs by intentionally accessing the isolated area. Since the slot machine executes the process sequentially, the program can be executed from the start process by accessing the isolation area after the last game process is completed, and the initial setting can be executed again. Thus, even if the initial setting function is set to a value different from the set value due to noise or the like during the game, the normal value can be reset by executing the initial setting again. Furthermore, in the initial setting process, the RAM clear is determined by the power interruption flag. However, it is possible to forcibly generate the RAM clear by accessing the isolation area without setting the power interruption flag. Become. On the other hand, since the game is performed in parallel with the pachinko machine described above, if the game itself is initialized, it becomes impossible to continue the game, but in the case of a slot machine, it becomes unnecessary after the game ends. Since it is necessary to initialize the information in the RAM, it is possible to eliminate the processing for initializing the information in the RAM by accessing the isolated area.

  The values set in the parameter information setting area 5400 are not sequentially set by user program processing such as initial setting of the CPU 4601. By setting the parameter area addresses and setting values in the ROM 4602 separately from the program. The parameter information set in the ROM 4602 is sequentially set in each function setting register of the CPU 4601 before the CPU 4601 starts the control program at startup. Thereby, various parameters can be set when the gaming machine 1 is turned on. Since the setting values of various parameters are information managed (determined) by the user, they are set in the ROM 4602 in which the game control program is stored.

[10-4. Game control]
[10-4-1. System reset start processing]
Next, the control of the slot machine of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart for explaining the procedure of the system reset activation process executed when the slot machine 4000 is reset. The system reset activation process is a process executed when the slot machine 4000 is powered on or when a power failure occurs, and is activated when a reset signal is input to the CPU 4601.

  When the system reset activation process is started, the CPU 4601 first executes a parameter setting process for setting various parameters necessary for executing the game (step S1010). Specifically, the setting value stored in the parameter information setting area 5400 included in the storage area is set in each function setting register of the CPU 4601, or the address of each area assigned to the access area is set as the setting value. By setting the address of each area as a set value, for example, a work area or a save area is assigned as a use area to the RAM area 5200, and an area not assigned as a use area (isolation area in FIG. 76) is set as an unused area. Assigned. The work area and the save area are divided into game control and debug (inspection function) (or other uses), respectively. Similarly to the RAM area 5200, the ROM area 5100 allocates an area for storing a program and data as a used area, and an area not allocated as a used area is allocated as an unused area.

  Next, the CPU 4601 executes a security check process (step S1012). The security check process is a process for determining whether or not the data stored in the ROM 4602 is normal data. If the data stored in the ROM 4602 is not normal data, for example, the ROM 4602 may be replaced with an illegal ROM, so the activation of the slot machine 4000 is stopped. Further, the CPU 4601 waits until the time required for the security check has elapsed (step S1014).

  Note that the processing from the power-on of the slot machine to the end of the security check (the processing up to step S1014) is not processing defined by the user program, but processing constituted by hardware in the CPU that cannot be changed by the developer. It has become.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes device initialization setting processing for initialization (step S1016). In the device initialization setting processing, processing such as activation setting of periodic processing (FIG. 80, timer interrupt processing) that executes predetermined processing periodically is executed. In the present embodiment, a function for preventing the user program from being rewritten after the security check, such as a random number function setting, is executed by the parameter setting process, and the device initialization setting process is performed for other functions. Running in. Thus, by dividing the initialization of the CPU 4601 into the parameter setting process and the device initialization setting process, the degree of freedom of game control is increased and fraud is not easily performed in the game.

  Further, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not to initialize the RAM 4603 (step S1018). In the process of step S1018, it is determined whether to perform a cold start to initialize the RAM 4603 or to perform a hot start to return to the game with the contents of the backed up RAM 4603.

  When performing a cold start for initializing the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is “Yes”), the CPU 4601 executes an initialization process for initializing the RAM 4603 (step S1020). The cold start is performed when the setting change operation of the gaming machine 1 is performed, when an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM 4603, or when the power interruption flag is not set.

  On the other hand, when performing a hot start for returning to the game based on the contents of the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is “No”), the CPU 4601 executes a process for returning the game based on the backed-up contents of the RAM 4603. (Step S1022). At this time, the return processing returns to the processing interrupted at the time of power interruption. Specifically, the process is returned to the process interrupted at the time of power interruption by any one of the processes from step S1024 to step S1042 of the system reset activation process to be described later or from step S1110 to step S1130 of the periodic process (FIG. 80).

  In the slot machine 4000 in the present embodiment, a checksum is calculated based on information stored in the RAM 4603 when a power failure occurs and when a recovery process is executed. At this time, only the game control work area excluding the debug (inspection function) work area out of all the areas to be used as work (game control work area and debug (inspection function) work area) It is good. The reason for calculating the checksum only in the game control work area is that the debug (inspection function) process is designed to maintain independence from the game control process, and that the game result may be affected. Because there is no processing, it is possible that some bugs may remain due to insufficient verification. In this case, a debug (inspection function) work area where information obtained by executing such processing is retained Setting the checksum to be calculated may impair the reliability of normal recovery from power interruption. On the other hand, since the game control process is directly related to the game, if it is mounted on a product with bugs remaining, it causes a big trouble in the market. In some cases, sales may be canceled and the product may need to be collected. In this case, it is extremely likely that the manufacturer and the hall will cause significant damage in terms of cost, etc. This is because the game control work area is more reliable than the debugging (inspection function) work area because the verification is performed on a case-by-case basis.

  When the initialization process ends or when a series of games ends, the CPU 4601 executes a game initial setting process in order to start a new game (step S1024). In the game initial setting process, a process of temporarily returning information in the RAM 4603 that is no longer necessary for performing a series of game controls to the initial setting state is executed.

  When the game initial setting process ends, the CPU 4601 executes an information signal 1 output process for outputting a debug (inspection function) signal at the start of the game (step S1026). In the information signal 1 output processing, processing such as setting a debugging (inspection function) signal to an initial state is performed. Information signal output processing is defined as information signal 1 to N output processing, and a necessary module is called at the timing of outputting an information signal. For example, when a debug (inspection function) signal (information regarding reel rotation start, start lever ON, winning combination) is output in the game start process during the game start process, Debug (inspection function) signal (determined combination that is stopped and displayed on each reel, payout associated with determinant combination) in winning determination process when outputting (inspection function) signal (stop operation signal, stopped symbol information, etc.) At the time of outputting the number information, the output signal information (number of payout medals) regarding the payout number at the time of payout, etc., the “information signal N output process” module necessary for the processing is appropriately called and executed.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a standby process for performing a process in a previous stage in which the player operates the start lever 4210 (step S1028). Prior to operating the start lever 4210, for example, it is determined whether or not a replay execution instruction has been made, whether or not a medal has been inserted, or whether or not a medal has been settled. The setting value of the game is confirmed.

  When start lever 4210 is operated, CPU 4601 executes a game start process for starting a game (step S1030). In the game start process, a random number for drawing a game is acquired, a winning combination is determined, and rotation of the reel 4301 is started. Thereafter, the CPU 4601 executes a wait process for waiting until the reel 4301 reaches a normal rotation speed (step S1032).

  When the reel 4301 reaches a normal rotation speed, the CPU 4601 makes it possible to accept input of the reel stop button 4211 and executes symbol stop processing for performing processing until all the reels 4301 stop (step S1034).

  Furthermore, when all the reels 4301 are stopped, the CPU 4601 executes a winning determination process for determining a winning combination based on the stopped symbols (step S1036). In the winning determination process, a winning combination is determined, and if it is determined to be a winning combination, a setting corresponding to the winning combination is performed, and a setting for executing a payout process corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines the current gaming state, adds the number of award medals to be paid out as the gaming value to the area corresponding to the current gaming state, and calculates the work ratio for calculating the proportion of the bonus in the RAM area 5200 (FIG. 76, refer to FIG. 77) (step S1038). The processing in step S1038 can be skipped when there is no prize medal to be paid out in step S1036, and the load on the CPU 4601 can be reduced.

  Even when the slot machine 4000 detects fraud and stops the game, the bonus rate calculation area update process (step S1038) is executed. Regardless of whether or not fraud has been detected, by executing these processes, it is possible to collect data for calculating the ratio of an accessory even during fraud notification.

  Finally, the CPU 4601 executes a game end process that performs a process at the end of the game (step S1042). In the game ending process, a payout process corresponding to the winning combination is executed, and if the prize is not won or the prize is not paid out, the process is skipped. When the game end process ends, the process returns to the game initial setting process, and the main loop process from step S1024 to step S1038 is executed.

[10-4-2. Periodic processing]
Next, a periodic process that is an interrupt process that is started at a predetermined cycle while the main loop process of the system reset initial activation process is being executed will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the regular process.

  When the periodic process is executed, the CPU 4601 first saves the values stored in all the registers (step S1110). At this time, the saved data is stored in the game control save area shown in FIG. As described above, since the periodic process is an interrupt process that is started while the main loop process is being executed, it is possible to continue the process after returning by saving the CPU registers used in the main loop process. It is necessary to.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 resets a watchdog timer built in the CPU (step S1112). As a result, the watchdog timer can be periodically cleared.

  Next, the CPU 4601 executes switch input processing for sampling input signals from various switches (step S1114). Further, a game state check process is executed (step S1116). In the game state check process, a process related to drive control of a driving body (stepping motor) that rotates the reel 4301 is performed. Specifically, stepping motor pulse output, origin position detection, and the like are performed.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes timer measurement processing for updating various timers used in game control (step S1118). Since the periodic process is executed periodically, the set time is the execution interval of the periodic process × the set number of times.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated. If the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio calculation / display process is called to perform the accessory ratio calculation work. The bonus rate is calculated with reference to the number of medals paid out in the area. The calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S1119). The accessory ratio calculation / display processing is the same as the accessory ratio calculation / display processing (FIGS. 23 and 24) described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the specific method for calculating the accessory ratio and the specific display method for the accessory ratio are the same as those described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, by calling the accessory ratio calculation / display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the accessory ratio, it is possible to check the accessory ratio (the gambling nature of the slot machine 4000) based on the latest data.

  It should be noted that, when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, all types of values (an accessory ratio, a continuous accessory ratio, a cumulative total, and a total cumulative) may be calculated. Only the displayed value may be calculated for each operation. In addition, an accessory ratio is calculated regardless of whether the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio indicator 1317 when the accessory ratio display switch 1318 is operated. May be.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes LED output processing for controlling the LEDs (step S1120). The control target LEDs are those controlled by the main board 4600, for example, a payout number display LED 4562. Moreover, the data for displaying an accessory ratio on LED are output.

  The CPU 4601 executes information output processing for outputting a signal to the external relay terminal board 4131 (step S1122). The output signal is transmitted to the hall computer 4800 via the external relay terminal plate 4131. Furthermore, CPU 4601 outputs the command stored in the command buffer to effect control board 4700 (step S1124).

  The CPU 4601 executes a random number update process for updating a random number used in the game (step S1126). In the random number update process, update of the random number to be generated by the software process is executed. Here, in addition to a random number generated only by software, a soft random number update process built in the CPU is executed. In the soft random number built in the CPU, the count itself is executed by hardware, but the trigger for the update is determined by this processing. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce program processing related to random number update.

  When the random number update process ends, the CPU 4601 performs a process for returning to the interrupted process (main loop process). Specifically, the value of the register saved in step S1110 is restored (step S1128). Further, the execution of the interrupt is permitted (step S1130). During execution of periodic processing (timer interrupt processing), even if a new timer interrupt occurs, the new timer interrupt is pending, and the timer interrupt processing executed immediately before has ended normally and the interrupt has been permitted. It is supposed to be executed. For this reason, the periodic processing (timer interrupt processing) is not executed in a multiple manner.

[10-4-3. Information signal output processing]
Subsequently, an information signal output process executed in a system reset activation process or the like will be described. The information signal output process is provided for each function (1 to N) of the output signal, and is constituted by a plurality of modules. For example, “for condition device output signal (signal output related to condition device operation)” “lottery determination process (signal output related to lottery)”. Although the output signals are different, the configuration of each information output process is basically the same, so the description of each flow is omitted. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the information signal output process of the present embodiment.

  When the information signal output process is started, the CPU 4601 first saves the values of all the registers of the CPU (step S1210). This is to prevent the value set in the register from being destroyed by executing the information signal output process (to ensure that the value is restored even if it is destroyed), and the values of all registers are saved in the stack area. It is supposed to let you. Further, the stack area used at this time is allocated to a debugging (inspection function) save area, and is assigned to a different area separated from the game control save area.

  Subsequently, the CPU 4601 acquires information to be referred to in order to select (ON / OFF) the information signal to be output (debugging (inspection function) signal) from the RAM 4603 (step S1212). In each information signal output process, only information stored in the RAM 4603 is referred to, and data is not written to the RAM 4603 within the process. If writing is necessary, information is output to a work area for debugging (inspection function). A dedicated work is provided, and the work is configured not to be used (including reference) in processes other than the information signal output process. As a result, the independence from the other game control programs can be ensured without using a common area even if the program for executing the information signal output process is arranged at a different location from the other game control programs. .

  Next, the CPU 4601 generates an information signal to be output based on the information acquired in the process of step S1212 (step S1214), and outputs the generated signal to the corresponding port (step S1216). Further, it waits until an information signal output time, which is a time for maintaining the output signal, has elapsed (step S1218). The information signal output time is determined in advance, and the debugging (inspection function) signal can be reliably transmitted to the transmission destination by setting a sufficient time. Thereafter, the values of all the registers saved in the process of step S1210 are restored (step S1220), and this process ends.

  As described above, the information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) is generated and output through the processing from step S1210 to step S1220. Then, the processing from step S1210 to step S1220 is executed for the output debug (inspection function) signal. Different types and numbers of signals are output for each function (1 to N) of the output signal. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of information signal output processes are defined for each function. However, a table defining output signals corresponding to functions is stored in the debug (inspection function) area. Information signal output processing may be made common by preparing in two data areas and selecting and outputting a signal corresponding to a function designated by the caller.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a program (signal output program) for executing an information signal output process or the like is stored in an area clearly distinguished from an area for storing a game control program (game control area). By providing an area (debug (inspection function) area), a program for debugging (inspection function) of the gaming machine 1 can be arranged independently. The signal output program is used for the purpose of debugging (inspection function) of the gaming machine 1 and is a process that does not affect the game result and does not impair the fairness of the game. For other purposes (for example, to arrange a game control program or general-purpose program to compensate for the lack of capacity in the game control area), the program should not be placed in the debug (inspection function) area. It has become.

  The signal output program is executed after being statically called from the game control program, and at this time, the address of the call destination is specified. Furthermore, the signal output program is modularized for each function, and when called, protects all registers used in the game control area. In addition, as described above, when the program processing of the game control area is being executed, access to the debugging (inspection function) work area is prohibited, and the debugging (inspection function) area is executed. In such a case, only reference to the game control work area is permitted, and writing is prohibited. In addition, it is also prohibited to call a module (including a subroutine) arranged in the game control area from the debug (inspection function) area. The program arranged in the debug (inspection function) area including the signal output program is always called in a subroutine format, and after the subroutine ends, it returns immediately after the call by the return instruction. The modules stored in the debugging (inspection function) area are configured for each purpose. With this configuration, the execution of the game control program is not affected by the execution of the signal output program (the program arranged in the debugging (inspection function) area).

  In the embodiment of the slot machine 4000, the RAM (game control work area, the work ratio calculation work area) erasing timing may be the same as steps S18 to S26 of FIG. The slot machine 4000 does not have a RAM clear switch, and when the setting change key switch 4112t is operated, the gaming state backup data is erased.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, in addition to the effects described in the example of the pachinko machine described above, it is possible to accurately calculate the ratio of the objects of the operating slot machine, and to improve the gambling characteristics of the operating gaming machine. I can confirm.

  Although the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings, the present invention is not limited to such specific configurations, and various modifications and equivalents within the spirit of the appended claims Includes configuration.

  Among the inventions disclosed in this specification, the following are typical examples of aspects of the invention other than those described in the claims.

(0) A gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
A main controller that executes a program for controlling the progress of the game;
An accessory ratio display for displaying information on the assigned game value,
The accessory ratio indicator has a display device and a driver circuit that drives the display device,
The main controller is
Sending data for display on the accessory ratio indicator to the driver circuit by serial communication,
The game according to any of the preceding items, wherein after the power is turned on, a synchronization method, a communication rate, a parity, and a stop bit are used for serial communication with the driver circuit. Machine.

  (1) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein communication between the main control device and the driver circuit is slower than communication between the main control device and a peripheral control device.

  As a result, it is possible to suppress an inaccurate display of the accessory ratio due to garbled data during communication.

(2) The main controller is
It has a work RAM that holds data related to the progress of the game and data for calculating the ratio of items even while the power is shut off,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the setting for the serial communication is executed after clearing the work RAM.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent display of an erroneous combination ratio by using data in the RAM having an incorrect content.

(3) The main controller is
Has the function of transmitting data stored in the FIFO buffer by serial communication,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein after the power is turned on, a data storage amount for determining a timing of sending data from the FIFO buffer is set.

  Thereby, data can be transmitted from the FIFO buffer with an arbitrary number of bits.

(4) A gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
A main controller that executes a program for controlling the progress of the game;
An accessory ratio display for displaying information on the assigned game value,
The accessory ratio indicator has a display device and a driver circuit that drives the display device,
The main controller, the display device, and the driver are configured such that the length of the signal line that connects the main controller and the driver circuit is longer than the length of the signal line that connects the driver circuit and the display device. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein a circuit is arranged.

  By making the signal line connecting the main control unit and the driver circuit long, it is easy to find unauthorized modifications without arranging parts around the main control unit, and the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device. By making the signal line shorter than the signal line connecting the main control unit and driver circuit, the influence of noise can be reduced and the ratio of objects can be displayed more accurately.

  (5) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio display are accommodated in one case.

  As a result, it is possible to easily find unauthorized modification without disposing other parts around the main controller, and to reduce the influence of noise.

  (6) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio display are arranged on a single printed circuit board.

  As a result, it is possible to easily find an unauthorized modification without disposing other parts on the printed circuit board around the main controller, and to reduce the influence of noise.

  (7) The gaming machine machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the accessory ratio indicator is configured to accommodate the display device and the driver circuit in one package.

  As a result, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be reduced. In addition, a signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be shortened.

  (8) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein a guard pattern (a ground pattern or a power supply pattern) is provided along a signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit.

  As a result, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit can be reduced.

  (9) The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the display direction of the accessory ratio display is the same as the display direction of the model number on the surface of the main controller.

  Accordingly, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the main control device is replaced and the displayed accessory ratio without taking an excessive posture.

(10) The driver circuit does not display characters and numbers on the display device, and has a standby mode for reducing power consumption,
The game according to any of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device sets the driver circuit to a standby state when the gaming machine ratio is in a closed state where the accessory ratio indicator cannot be visually recognized. Machine.

  This can prevent useless power consumption of the gaming machine when the display of the accessory ratio is unnecessary.

(11) A gaming machine that provides a player with a prize ball as a game value by winning a game ball launched toward a game area into a predetermined winning slot,
A main controller that controls the progress of the game;
With an accessory ratio indicator that displays information about prize balls,
The prize opening includes a general prize opening where the shape of the entrance does not change depending on the gaming state, and an electric prize opening where the entrance opens or expands depending on the gaming state,
The main control device uses the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player as a trigger for at least the number of first prize balls to be paid out when a prize is awarded to the general prize opening and a prize to the electric prize slot. Count separately from the number of second prize balls to be paid out,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the accessory ratio display unit displays information relating to a ratio between the number of the first prize balls and the number of the second prize balls.

(12) The main controller stores the counted number of prize balls in a memory,
The memory stores a check code for verifying the number of stored prize balls,
The game machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the main control device erases the number of prize balls stored in the memory when the check code is not normal.

  Thereby, an abnormality in the number of prize balls stored in the memory can be detected, and display of an incorrect combination ratio (ratio between the number of first prize balls and the number of second prize balls) can be suppressed.

(13) The main control device
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which stored contents are retained even when the power is shut off,
Storing game control data in the first backup area;
Store the data of the number of prize balls for calculating the ratio of bonuses in the second backup area,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the data stored in the first backup area and the data stored in the second backup area are erased under different conditions.

  As a result, when at least one of the game control data and the winning ball number data for calculating the ratio of the winning combination is normal, only the abnormal data can be erased and the normal data can be left.

(14) The main control device
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which stored contents are retained even when the power is shut off,
Storing game control data in the first backup area;
Store the data of the number of prize balls for calculating the ratio of bonuses in the second backup area,
If the RAM clear switch is operated when the gaming machine is turned on, the data stored in the first backup area is erased, but the data stored in the second backup area is not erased. The gaming machine according to the item.

  If the bonus ratio calculation / display data 13136 can be deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the bonus ratio calculated by the gaming machine can be deleted at an arbitrary timing. For this reason, the backed-up character ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, and the erase of the character ratio calculation / display data 13136 by the operation of the game hall staff is prevented. , It is possible to prevent concealment in a state where the ratio of the accessory is high. For this reason, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine that has been remodeled to a state in which the accessory ratio is high.

(15A) a gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information on the assigned game value,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates information relating to a gaming value to be displayed on the display means in response to input / output of a predetermined signal.

(15B) The information on the game value is a base,
The control means includes
Controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a lot of game values and a normal game state other than the special game state,
The number of winning balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state is the number of consumed balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state (for example, the number of game balls launched into the gaming area, the game discharged from the gaming machine) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated by dividing by the number of balls, the sum of the number of gaming balls that have passed through the out mouth and the number of winning balls).

  (15C) The control means receives, as the predetermined signal, a timing at which a winning detection signal, a winning ball payout command reception confirmation signal or a winning ball payout completion signal is received, The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the number of prize balls used for calculation of a base for display on the display means is updated at a timing at which a prize ball payout command for instructing a payout is transmitted.

(15D) The control means includes
Stores the total number of winning balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, upon receiving a signal detecting the winning of the game ball to the winning opening provided in the gaming area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
Update the total number of winning balls using the calculated number of winning balls,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of winning balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15E) with payout control means for controlling payout of prize balls to the player,
The control means includes
Stores the total number of winning balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected at a winning opening provided in the gaming area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Updating the total number of winning balls using the number of winning balls instructed to the payout control means;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of winning balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15F) with payout control means for controlling payout of prize balls to the player,
The control means includes
Stores the total number of winning balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected at a winning opening provided in the gaming area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Receiving confirmation of the instruction from the payout control means,
Updating the total number of winning balls using the number of winning balls corresponding to the instruction that received the receipt confirmation;
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of winning balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15G) with payout control means for controlling payout of prize balls to the player,
The control means includes
Stores the total number of winning balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected at a winning opening provided in the gaming area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated,
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Receiving from the payout control means completion of the payout of the prize ball according to the instruction;
Updating the total number of winning balls using the number of winning balls corresponding to the instruction received completion of the payout,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of winning balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

  (15H) The control means is triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal, information update means for updating information relating to the game value to be displayed on the display means, and information relating to the updated game value is indicated in the display means. The game machine according to any one of the preceding items, further comprising processing display means that can process (statistical processing) and display the result of the arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

  According to the inventions 15A to 15H, it is possible to accurately execute processing relating to acquisition of game media.

(16A) A gaming machine that gives a player a gaming value,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information on the assigned game value,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates information relating to a game value to be displayed on the display means in relation to a game condition satisfying a predetermined condition.

(16B) The information on the game value is a base,
The control means includes
Controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a lot of game values and a normal game state other than the special game state,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated at a timing when the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(16C) The control means includes:
Stores the total number of winning balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a winning of a game ball is detected at a winning opening provided in the gaming area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated and stored in a buffer,
The predetermined number is moved from the buffer to the total number of winning balls at a predetermined timing, and the total number of winning balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state (for example, the number of game balls launched into the game area) The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the base is calculated by dividing by the number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming machine, the sum of the number of balls passing through the outlet and the number of winning balls).

(16D) The predetermined timing is a timing when the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
When the number of winning balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer, and adds the predetermined number to the total number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the predetermined number is moved to a number.

  (16E) The control means, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal, updates information relating to the game value to be displayed on the display means, and displays the information relating to the updated game value to the display means. The game machine according to any one of the preceding items, further comprising processing display means that can process (statistical processing) and display the result of the arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

  According to the inventions of 16A to 16E, it is possible to accurately execute processing different from game characteristics while maintaining game characteristics within the regular restrictions of the main control device.

(17A) A gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information on the assigned game value,
The control means includes
Count the number of balls consumed by the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein information relating to a gaming value to be displayed on the display means is updated in association with the counted number of balls consumed satisfying a predetermined condition.

(17B) The control means includes:
Controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a lot of game values and a normal game state other than the special game state,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein information regarding the gaming value is calculated at a timing when the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

  (17C) The control means may calculate the number of consumed balls based on the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, or the sum of the number of game balls and winning balls passed through the outlet. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the game machine is counted.

(17D) The information on the game value is a base,
The control means includes
Remembers the total number of outballs used to calculate the base,
Calculate the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state, store in a buffer,
The base is calculated by moving a predetermined number from the buffer to the total number of out balls at a predetermined timing, and dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the total number of out balls. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, characterized in that:

(17E) The predetermined timing is a timing when the number of balls consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number,
When the number of balls consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total out-ball number to thereby add a total out-ball from the buffer. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein a predetermined number is moved to the number.

(17F) The control means
The special symbol variation display game for deriving the special gaming state is executed in response to winning at the starting winning opening,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein when the special symbol variation display game holding memory is an upper limit value, the winning ball number is not stored and the number of winning balls is counted.

  (17G) The control means is triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal, information update means for updating information relating to a game value to be displayed on the display means, and information relating to the updated game value is indicated in the display means The game machine according to any one of the preceding items, further comprising processing display means that can process (statistical processing) and display the result of the arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

  According to the inventions 17A to 17G, it is possible to accurately execute processing different from game characteristics while maintaining game characteristics.

(18A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information about the assigned game value;
A main body frame to which a game board having a game area in which the game is performed is detachably attached;
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the display means displays information related to the gaming value even when the main body frame is closed.

(18B) The main body frame is rotatably attached to an outer frame attached to an island facility of a game arcade,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the display means is provided on the back side of the gaming machine that is visible when the main body frame is opened.

(18C) The control means is attached to the body frame,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the display means is provided in a case of the control means so as to be visible from the back side of the gaming machine.

  According to the inventions 18A to 18C, it is possible to suppress a decrease in sales of halls.

(19A)
A gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information on the assigned game value,
The control means includes
Information updating means for updating information relating to a game value to be displayed on the display means in relation to satisfying a predetermined condition in the game;
Game execution means for performing a special symbol variation display game triggered by winning at the start winning opening,
In each of the preceding paragraphs, the game value is updated even when the predetermined condition is satisfied when the special symbol variation display game is being played by the game execution means. The gaming machine described.

(19B) The information on the game value is a base,
The control means, as the predetermined condition, at the timing of any one of detection of winning to a winning opening, transmission of a prize ball payout command, reception confirmation of a prize ball payout command, and reception of a prize ball payout completion signal The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the number of prize balls used for calculating a base for display on the display means is updated.

  According to the inventions of 19A to 19B, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which sufficient countermeasures against fraud are taken even during a variable display game.

(20A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to a player,
Main control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Production control means for controlling the production of a special symbol variation display game that is triggered by winning at the start opening,
Game value information display means for displaying information on the assigned game value,
The production control means includes
Control the transition to the low power mode where the power consumption of the gaming machine is reduced from the normal mode,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the display mode is not changed so that power consumption of the gaming value information display means is reduced during the low power mode.

(20B) An effect display means configured to display an effect of the special symbol variation display game and configured by a liquid crystal display means having a backlight,
The effect display means reduces the brightness of the backlight during the low power mode,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the gaming value information display means is configured by a light emitting diode and does not reduce luminance even during the low power mode.

(20C) provided with an effect display means for displaying the effect of the special symbol variation display game;
The effect display means controls the display mode to the low power mode when a predetermined time has elapsed after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is consumed.
The game value information display means does not change the display mode so as to reduce power consumption even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is consumed. The gaming machine described in the preceding sections.

  According to the inventions 20A to 20C, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a substantial energy saving mode.

(21A) A gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information on the assigned game value,
The control means includes
A game state control means for controlling a normal game state and any one of a plurality of advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state;
The information regarding the gaming value is calculated and updated by dividing the number of winning balls in the normal gaming state by the number of consumed balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state. Game machines.

  (21B) The control means, according to any of the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine, and the sum of the number of game balls and winning balls passed through the out mouth, The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state is counted.

(21C) The control means
When the special symbol variation display game is a big hit, the advantageous gaming state is derived, and control is performed so that the player can open a winning opening from which a lot of gaming values can be obtained,
The advantageous game state is from the jackpot determination by the special symbol variation display game to the start of the next special symbol variation display game, and the number of winning balls and the number of consumed balls are excluded from the calculation of information on the game value The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, characterized by:

(21D) The control means includes
In the advantageous gaming state, the player controls to open a winning opening that can acquire a lot of gaming values,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the number of game balls won in the winning area is excluded from the number of game balls launched in the game area, and the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state is counted.

  According to the inventions 21A to 21D, accurate information can be output outside the gaming machine.

(22A) A gaming machine that grants a game ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information on the given game ball,
In the game area where the launched game ball rolls, there is a trigger for deriving a special game state that facilitates acquisition of a large amount of game balls, and a trigger for deriving the open state from the closed state of the start port There is at least a passage opening,
The control means includes
It is possible to control the special game state that is easy to derive the open state of the start port,
The number of prize balls awarded to the player is excluded by excluding the number of prize balls given when the player is controlled to the special game state or the special game state and the number of balls consumed by the player. The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein information relating to the gaming ball is calculated and updated by dividing by a number of consumed balls consumed by the person.

  (22B) The control means, according to any of the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine, and the sum of the number of game balls and winning balls passed through the out mouth, The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the number of balls in the normal state is counted.

  (22C) The control means sets the expanded state from the hit determination by the normal symbol variation display game to the start of the next normal symbol variation display game, and determines the number of winning balls and the number of consumed balls related to the game ball. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the gaming machine is excluded from calculation of information.

  (22D) The control means is configured to count the number of balls consumed in the normal state by excluding the number of game balls won in the start port from the number of game balls launched into the game area. The gaming machine described in each section.

  According to the inventions 22A to 22D, accurate information can be output outside the gaming machine.

(23A) a launcher that is operable by the player and that launches a game ball toward the game area;
A prize ball granting means for granting a predetermined number of prize balls when the game ball is detected at a winning opening provided in the game area;
Main control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give an advantageous gaming state to the player when the game ball is detected at a predetermined winning port among the winning ports;
Based on information transmitted from the main control means, a peripheral control means for determining an effect to appear, and a gaming machine comprising:
The main control means has an information update means capable of updating information about the given game ball to either increase or decrease,
The first state where the information related to the given game ball can be updated by the information update means, and the information update means can be used to update the information related to the given game ball while the information update means can update the information. There is at least a second state in which the rate at which the information on the given game ball is updated to increase compared to the first state is suppressed,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of a special effect indicating that the transition from the first state to the second state has occurred.

(23B) The information on the game value is a base,
The main control means includes
Controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a lot of game values and a normal game state other than the special game state,
Dividing the number of winning balls in the normal gaming state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state, calculating the base,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect with the timing at which the base is likely to decrease as the second state.

(23C) The main control means includes:
Write information about the game ball to the storage area at a predetermined time, every predetermined number of winning balls or every predetermined number of consumed balls,
Compare the information about the game sphere written in the storage area with the information about the game sphere stored in the storage area before the write, determine the increase or decrease of the information about the game sphere,
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect according to the determined increase / decrease.

  According to the invention of 23A to 23C, even if the state where the variable display game is interrupted continues for a long time, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

(24A) A gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
Control means for repeatedly executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information about the assigned game value;
Prize ball number acquisition means for acquiring the number of prize balls that the player acquires at a predetermined timing;
Consumption ball detecting means for detecting the consumption ball consumed by the player,
The control means includes
When the predetermined timing and the consumption ball detection by the consumption ball number detecting means occur within the same repetition, the award ball number acquired at the predetermined timing and the detected consumption ball number are within the same repetition. Count with
The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein information relating to the gaming value is calculated using the counted number of prize balls and the number of balls consumed.

(24B) The information on the game value is a base,
The control means includes
Controlling the progress of the game by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a lot of game values and a normal game state other than the special game state,
Counting the total number of winning balls in the normal gaming state and the number of gaming balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state within the same repetition,
The game according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the game value information is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls in the normal gaming state by the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state. Machine.

  According to the inventions of 24A to 24B, information on the number of game media acquired by the player can be quickly displayed.

(25A) A gaming machine that provides gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information about the assigned game value;
Out-port detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through an out-port provided in the lower part of the game area;
A winning ball detecting means for detecting a winning ball to a predetermined winning opening;
The control means includes
It has a gaming state control means for controlling to any gaming state among at least a normal gaming state and a special gaming state in which a player can acquire more gaming value than the normal gaming state,
Count the number of game balls that have passed through the out port from the output of the out port detection means,
Count the number of winning balls from the output of the winning ball detection means,
Count the number of balls consumed by the player by the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the counted out outlet and the number of winning balls,
The information relating to the gaming value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state at a predetermined timing by the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state. The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs.

(25B) A gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information about the assigned game value;
Detecting means for counting the number of game balls launched into the game area,
The control means includes
It has a gaming state control means for controlling to any gaming state among at least a normal gaming state and a special gaming state in which a player can acquire more gaming value than the normal gaming state,
Counting the number of game balls launched into the game area from the output of the detection means, counting the consumed game balls consumed by the player,
The information relating to the gaming value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state at a predetermined timing by the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state. The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs.

(25C) a gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information about the assigned game value;
Detecting means for counting the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine,
The control means includes
It has a gaming state control means for controlling to any gaming state among at least a normal gaming state and a special gaming state in which a player can acquire more gaming value than the normal gaming state,
Count the number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine from the output of the detection means, count the number of consumption balls consumed by the player,
The information relating to the gaming value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state at a predetermined timing by the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state. The gaming machine described in the preceding paragraphs.

  According to the inventions 25A to 25C, it is possible to accurately execute processing relating to acquisition of game media.

(26A) a gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
Control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Display means for displaying information on the assigned game value,
The control means includes
A gaming state control means for controlling to any gaming state among at least a normal gaming state and a special gaming state in which a player can acquire more gaming value than the normal gaming state;
Prize ball number counting means for counting the number of prize balls excluding the number of prize balls given when a game ball launched toward the right side of the game area wins a winning opening that can be awarded;
Consuming ball number counting means for counting the number of consumed balls consumed by the player excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area,
The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, wherein the control means updates information relating to the gaming value by using the counted number of prize balls and the number of balls consumed.

(26B) The information on the game value is a base,
Excluding the number of prize balls given when a game ball launched toward the right side of the game area wins a prize-winning entrance and counting the number of prize balls in the normal gaming state;
Excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area, counting the number of consumption balls in the normal game state,
The control means calculates the information related to the gaming value by dividing the counted number of winning balls in the normal gaming state by the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state. Game machines.

  (26C) The control means detects a passage of a game ball in a gate portion provided on the right side of the game area or a winning in a winning opening provided on the right side of the game area for a predetermined period, The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the gaming machine is excluded from counting the number of winning balls and the number of balls consumed.

  (26D) The control means determines the predetermined period according to any one of the elapse of a predetermined time from the last detection, the time for consuming a predetermined number of game balls, or the time for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls. The gaming machine according to any of the preceding items, characterized by:

  (26E) The control means excludes the passing ball number of the gate portion provided on the right side of the gaming area and the winning ball number to the winning opening provided on the right side of the gaming area, The gaming machine according to any one of the preceding items, wherein the number of balls consumed is counted.

  According to the inventions 26A to 26E, accurate information can be output outside the gaming machine.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
2 outer frame 3 door frame 4 main body frame 5 game board 5a game area 930 power supply board box 951 payout control board 1300 main control unit 1310 main control board 1311 main control MPU (CPU)
1312 RAM
1313 ROM
1314 Main control I / O port 1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Main liquid crystal display device 2002 First start port 2004 Second start port 4000 Slot machine (game machine)
4210 Start lever 4211 Reel stop button 4300 Symbol variation display device 4301 Reel 4341 Reel drive motor 4500 Image display body 4600 Main board (game control device)
4601 CPU
4602 ROM
4603 RAM
4700 Production control board 5100 ROM area 5200 RAM area 5300 I / O area 5400 Parameter information setting area

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that gives gaming value to a player,
Main control means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game;
Production control means for controlling the production of a special symbol variation display game that is triggered by winning at the start opening,
Game value information display means for displaying information on the assigned game value,
The production control means includes
Control the transition to the low power mode where the power consumption of the gaming machine is reduced from the normal mode,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the display mode is not changed during the low power mode so that the power consumption of the gaming value information display means is reduced.

Images